Palm Cell Phone PTR690HKP User Manual

Sprint® Service  
Palm® Centro™ Smart Device  
www.sprint.com  
© Sprint Nextel. All rights reserved. No  
reproduction in whole or in part without prior  
written approval. SPRINT and other trademarks  
are trademarks of Sprint Nextel.  
PN: 406-11134-01  
v. 1.1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Palm Take Back and Recycling Program  
This symbol indicates that Palm products should be recycled and not be disposed of in unsorted  
municipal waste. Palm products should be sent to a facility that properly recycles electrical and  
electronic equipment. For information on environmental programs, visit:  
As part of Palm’s corporate commitment to be a good steward of the environment, we strive to use  
environmentally friendly materials, reduce waste, and develop the highest standards in electronics recycling.  
Our recycling program keeps Palm handheld devices, smartphones, and mobile companions out of landfills  
through evaluation and disposition for reuse and recycling.  
Palm customers may participate in the recycling program free of charge. Visit palm.com/recycle or in the US  
call 877-869-7256 for additional details and information about how you can help reduce electronic waste.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Welcome to Sprint  
Sprint and Nextel have come together, offering you more choice and flexibility to do  
whatever you want, whenever you want.  
This full combination brings you access to more products, more services, and more of what  
you need to do more of what you want.  
Welcome and thank you for choosing Sprint.  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
How to Use This Guide  
We know you’re eager to start using your device right away, and the sections of this guide  
are designed to help you do just that.  
process of setting up your new Palm Centro™ Smart Device, your Sprint service, and  
your computer.  
device and service with quick, easy-to-follow instructions. This section also describes  
the features of your device’s phone and shows you how to use Sprint service features  
such as voicemail, call waiting, and call forwarding.  
Sprint Power Vision features, including Web browsing, messaging, and email. It also  
describes other types of wireless connections, such as Bluetooth® wireless technology.  
Section 4: Your Portable Media Device shows you how to use your device’s camera—  
including how to use the Sprint Picture MailSM application—and how to transfer and  
listen to music files on your device.  
Section 5: Your Mobile Organizer guides you through the process of using the built-in,  
full-featured, Palm OS® by ACCESS organizer, which gives you instant access to your  
Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, Memos, Calculator, and more.  
Section 6: Managing Your Information and Settings describes the tools for managing files  
and applications and the preferences that enable you to customize your device.  
Section 7: Resources answers frequently asked questions and shows you what to do if  
something goes wrong. It also includes a helpful glossary of terms.  
Section 8: Safety and Specifications outlines recommended safety and maintenance  
guidelines and displays the technical specifications for your Centro device.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
about information that helps you safely use your phone. Failure to read  
and follow the Important Safety Information in this phone guide may  
result in serious bodily injury, death, or property damage.  
WARNING:  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 1  
Setting Up Your Smart Device  
and Your Computer  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 1A  
Setting Up Your Palm Centro™ Smart Device  
In This Section  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
   
What You Need  
Your Palm Centro™ smart device box contains the following:  
Hardware  
Centro smart device.  
Rechargeable battery.  
AC charger.  
USB sync cable.  
Sprint charger adapter.  
Software  
Palm Software Installation CD (includes desktop synchronization software and links to  
bonus software for your device).  
You’ll also need the following items to complete the installation and activation:  
An activated Sprint service plan.  
A location with wireless coverage for your device.  
An electrical outlet.  
The computer with which you want to synchronize your personal information.  
Documentation  
Read This First setup poster.  
Welcome to Sprint brochure.  
Getting Started guide.  
Setting Up Email booklet.  
Experience Sprint Power Vision guide.  
Terms & Conditions.  
Warranty and Software License Agreement.  
8
Section 1A: Device Setup  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Your New Centro Smart Device by Palm  
Your Device’s Features: Front View  
3. 5-way  
Navigator  
1. Indicator  
Light  
2. Earpiece  
4. Power/End  
5. Applications  
13. Volume  
Button  
12. Side  
Button  
6. Menu  
11. Talk  
10. Phone  
9. Calendar  
7. Messaging  
8. Option  
1. Indicator Light provides the status of your device’s battery. Red indicates that your  
device is charging and green indicates that your device is fully charged.  
2. Earpiece serves as the speaker on your device when you are not using the  
speakerphone feature or a headset.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3. 5-way Navigator gives you one-handed access to moving around the device screen  
instructions.  
4. Power/End turns the device’s phone on and off, wakes up and turns off the screen,  
and hangs up calls.  
5. Applications opens Applications view.  
6. Menu opens the application menus.  
7. Messaging opens the Messaging application.  
8. Option activates the secondary function of a key or button. See “Using the Keyboard”  
on page 46 for details.  
9. Calendar opens the Calendar application.  
10. Phone opens the Phone application.  
11. Talk dials when a phone number is selected or entered, and answers an incoming  
phone call.  
12. Side Button records voice memos by default, and performs context-sensitive actions  
when an application is open, such as playing or pausing MP3 files in the Pocket  
Tunes™ application. You can also reassign this button to open your favorite  
application.  
13. Volume Button adjusts the earpiece, speaker, and ringer volume levels.  
10  
Section 1A: Device Setup  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
Your Device’s Features: Back View  
15. Speaker  
14. Self-portrait  
Mirror  
23. Camera Lens  
16. Battery Door  
22. Infrared (IR) Port  
21. Expansion Card Slot  
17. Headset  
Jack  
19. Charger 18. Sync  
Jack Connector  
20. Microphone  
14. Self-portrait Mirror enables you to take a picture of yourself.  
15. Speaker plays ringtones and alarms, and serves as the speaker for the speakerphone  
feature and other audio playback.  
16. Battery Door slides down to provide access to the battery compartment.  
17. Headset Jack enables you to connect a hands-free headset. Use only headsets that are  
compatible with your device.  
18. Sync Connector enables you to attach the USB sync cable to your device.  
19. Charger Jack enables you to attach the AC charger to your device.  
20. Microphone serves as the mouthpiece on your device’s phone.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11  
                   
21. Expansion Card Slot allows you to expand the capabilities of your device using a  
22. Infrared (IR) Port uses infrared technology to transmit information to and receive  
information from other infrared-enabled devices that use compatible software.  
23. Camera Lens enables you to take pictures using the built-in camera.  
Your device’s speaker includes a large magnet, so be sure to keep your  
device away from credit cards or other items that could become  
demagnetized.  
Note:  
Your Device’s Features: Top View  
24. Sound On  
26. Sound Off  
27. Stylus  
25. Ringer Switch  
24. Sound On turns on the ringer and all other sounds, including alarms and music, when  
the Ringer switch is set to this position.  
25. Ringer Switch controls the ringer setting. See “Setting System Sounds” on page 276  
for details on changing the settings.  
26. Sound Off silences the ringer and turns off all other sounds, including alarms and  
music, when the Ringer switch is set to this position.  
27. Stylus allows you to tap options on your device’s screen. To use the stylus, slide it out  
of the slot and hold it as you would a pen or pencil.  
12  
Section 1A: Device Setup  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
Inserting the Battery  
Use only Sprint-approved or manufacturer-approved batteries and  
WARNING:  
chargers with your device. The failure to use a Sprint-approved or  
manufacturer-approved battery and charger may increase the risk of  
your device overheating, catching fire, or exploding, which may result in  
serious bodily injury, death, or property damage.  
1. Gently press down on the Battery Door, and then slide the door downward to remove  
it from your device.  
BatteryDoor  
Battery Contacts  
Battery  
Compartment  
Device Contacts  
2. Align the battery contacts with the contacts inside the device compartment.  
3. Insert the battery into the compartment at a 45-degree angle, and then press it into  
place.  
4. Slide the battery door onto the back of the device until it clicks into place.  
5. Follow the onscreen instructions to set up your device.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13  
     
Buy an extra battery as a spare for long trips or heavy data use. Visit  
that are approved by Sprint and that are compatible with your device.  
Tip:  
14  
Section 1A: Device Setup  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Charging the Battery  
The battery comes with a sufficient charge to complete the setup process and activate your  
phone. After activation, we recommend charging your device for three and a half hours to  
give it a full charge. See “Maximizing Battery Life” on page 18 for tips on maximizing the  
life of your device’s battery.  
1. Plug the AC charger into a wall outlet.  
2. Connect the charger cable to the charger jack on the bottom of the device. Make sure  
the arrow on the connector is facing up, toward your device’s screen.  
3. To confirm that your device is charging, check the indicator light.  
Red indicates that your device is charging.  
Green indicates that your device is fully charged.  
Indicator Light  
If the battery is fully drained, it may take a few moments for the indicator light to turn on  
while the battery is charging.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15  
             
You can also charge your device by connecting it to your computer with  
the sync cable. You can do this with or without using the charger cable  
page 34). Keep in mind that it takes longer to charge the battery using  
the sync cable, and if your laptop isn’t plugged into a power source, it  
can drain the laptop’s battery.  
Tip:  
The onscreen battery icon displays the power status:  
Full battery : Battery is not connected to a wall outlet and is fully charged.  
Partial battery : Battery is not connected to a wall outlet and has some power but is  
not fully charged.  
Almost-empty battery with red at the bottom : Battery needs to be charged  
immediately.  
Your device’s indicator light blinks red when the battery needs to be  
charged.  
Note:  
Red lightning bolt : Battery is connected to a wall outlet and is charging.  
Green lightning bolt : Battery is connected to a wall outlet and is fully charged.  
To see exactly how much power is left in your battery, tap the onscreen  
battery icon.  
Tip:  
16  
Section 1A: Device Setup  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Using a Sprint Charger Adapter  
If the connector on your Sprint-approved 1 Amp AC charger or vehicle charger doesn’t fit  
into the connector on the bottom of your device, use the included Sprint charger adapter.  
Use only with 1 Amp AC chargers distributed by Sprint for your device.  
Using any unapproved AC charger may destroy the AC charger and cause  
a fire.  
WARNING:  
1. Plug the AC charger into a power source.  
2. Connect the Sprint charger adapter to the charger  
jack on bottom of the device.  
3. Connect the charger cable to the Sprint charger  
adapter.  
SprintCharger  
Adapter  
4. Charge your device as described earlier.  
Battery Life  
Battery life depends on individual use. Consumption factors include signal strength,  
speakerphone use, and use of wireless features.  
If the battery drains to the point where your device doesn’t turn on, the device stores your  
information safely until you recharge the battery. To avoid draining the battery, we  
recommend that you charge and synchronize your device every day, especially if you use the  
wireless features of your phone often.  
Using your device’s phone reduces the battery life. You can extend the  
battery life by turning off your device’s phone while using the organizer  
features. In any case, regular charging is recommended for optimal  
performance.  
Note:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17  
                           
Maximizing Battery Life  
You can increase the life of your device’s battery by following a few easy guidelines.  
Remember that battery life depends on how you use your device.  
Charge your device whenever you’re at your desk, or charge it overnight each day. The  
lithium-ion (Li-ion) battery has a much longer useful life when it is topped off  
frequently, versus being charged after it is fully drained.  
Your device’s wireless features (phone, email, messaging, Web, and any applications  
that use a Sprint Power Vision connection, such as Sprint TVsm) and media features  
(camera, media players, and games) consume more power than its organizer features. If  
you spend a lot of time using the wireless and media features, keep an eye on the  
battery icon and charge when necessary.  
If you don’t plan to use the wireless features on your device for awhile, turn off your  
to a different number or let all calls be picked up by voicemail (see “Call Forwarding” on  
As with any mobile phone, if you are in an area with no wireless coverage, your device  
searches for a signal, which consumes power. If you cannot move to an area of better  
coverage, you may want to temporarily turn off your phone. While your phone is off,  
you can continue to use your device’s nonwireless features.  
Turn down the screen brightness (see Adjusting the Brightness” on page 278).  
Decrease the settings in Power Preferences and turn off Beam Receive (see “Optimizing  
Turn off the Bluetooth® feature if you are not using it (see “Connecting to a Bluetooth®  
Set the VersaMail AutoSync option to download messages at a scheduled time, rather  
18  
Section 1A: Device Setup  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                               
You can buy an extra battery as a spare for long airplane trips or periods of  
heavy use. To purchase batteries that are compatible with your smart  
Tip:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
19  
20  
Section 1A: Device Setup  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 1B  
Setting Up Service  
In This Section  
Setting up service on your new Palm Centro™ smart device is quick and easy. This section  
walks you through the necessary steps to unlock your device, set up your voicemail,  
establish passwords, and contact Sprint for assistance with your Sprint service.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
21  
           
Making Your First Call  
Determining If Your Device’s Phone Is Already Activated  
If you received your device in the mail or purchased it at a Sprint Store, it probably has  
already been activated. All you need to do is unlock it.  
If your phone is not activated, please call Sprint at 1-888-211-4727.  
Unlocking Your Device  
1. If the screen is off, press and release Power/End to wake up the screen.  
2. Press Center  
on the 5-way  
to turn off Keyguard (see “Moving Around the  
).  
Device Screen” on page 42 for information on the 5-way  
3. Enter your four-digit lock code. (For security purposes, the code is not visible as you  
type.)  
If you can’t recall your lock code, try using the last four digits of either  
your Social Security number or your wireless phone number, or try 0000.  
If that doesn’t work, call Sprint Customer Service at 1-888-211-4727.  
See “Where to Learn More” on page 334 for other ways to get help from  
Sprint if you are having trouble with your service.  
Note:  
22  
Section 1B: Setting Up Service  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Making a Call  
1. Press Phone  
2. Press Center  
.
on the 5-way  
to turn off Keyguard  
information on Keyguard).  
3. Tap the onscreen Dial Pad or press the number keys on the  
keyboard to enter the number you want to call.  
4. Press Talk  
to dial.  
5. After you finish the call, press Power/End  
to end the call.  
Adjusting Call Volume  
While a call is in progress, press the Volume button on the side of your device to adjust the  
call volume.  
To increase the volume, press the upper half of the Volume button.  
To decrease the volume, press the lower half of the Volume button.  
Volume Button  
Side Button  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
23  
     
What’s My Phone Number?  
1. Make sure your phone is on (see “Turning Your  
information).  
LookHerefor  
Your Phone  
Number  
2. Press Phone  
.
3. Press Menu  
.
4. Select Options, and then select Phone Info.  
24  
Section 1B: Setting Up Service  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setting Up Your Voicemail  
All unanswered calls to your device’s phone are automatically transferred to your voicemail,  
even if your phone is in use or turned off.  
To set up your voicemail:  
1. Press Phone  
.
2. Press and hold 1 or tap the Voicemail favorite on the Phone screen.  
3. Follow the system prompts to:  
Create your password.  
Record your name announcement.  
Record your greeting.  
Choose whether or not to activate Skip Pass Code (a feature that lets you access  
your voicemail simply by pressing and holding 1, bypassing the need for you to  
enter your password). If you do not activate Skip Pass Code, your device uses the  
Voicemail Pass Code feature, which requires you to enter your password each time  
you want to access your voicemail.  
If you are concerned about unauthorized access to your voicemail  
account, we recommend that you use the Voicemail Pass Code.  
Note:  
For more information about using your voicemail, see “Using Voicemail” on page 63.  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Creating Sprint Account Passwords  
As a Sprint customer, you enjoy unlimited access to your personal account information,  
your voicemail account, and your Sprint Power Vision account. To ensure that no one else  
has access to your information, you need to create passwords to protect your privacy.  
Account Username and Password  
If you are the account owner, you will create an account username and password to use to  
sign on to www.sprint.com and to use when calling Sprint Customer Service. To create your  
username and password, visit www.sprint.com, click Need to register for access?, and  
follow the online instructions. If you are not the account owner (if someone else pays for  
your Sprint service), you can also get a sub-account password at www.sprint.com.  
Voicemail Password  
You’ll create your voicemail password when you set up your voicemail. See “Setting Up Your  
Sprint Power VisionPassword  
With your Centro device, you may elect to set up a Sprint Power Vision password. This  
optional password can be used to authorize the purchase of Premium Services content and  
to protect personal information on multi-phone accounts.  
For more information or to change your passwords, sign on to www.sprint.com or call  
Sprint Customer Service at 1-888-211-4727.  
26  
Section 1B: Setting Up Service  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
Section 1C  
Synchronizing Information  
In This Section  
Section 1C: Synchronizing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
27  
   
Why Connect My Device to My Computer?  
You need to install the desktop software and connect the sync cable so that you can  
synchronize the information on your computer with the information on your device. You  
can use either Palm® Desktop software (included) or Microsoft Outlook for Windows (sold  
separately) as your synchronization software.  
Synchronization means you can enter or change information on your device or on your  
computer and then synchronize to automatically update the information in both places.  
There’s no need to enter the information twice. We strongly recommend that you  
synchronize your device and your computer frequently to keep your information up-to-date  
(and backed up) in both locations.  
System Requirements  
Windows computers  
Windows XP Service Pack 2, Windows XP Media Center Edition, or Windows Vista  
(32-bit version only)  
32MB of available memory (RAM)  
170MB of free hard disk space  
CD drive  
Available USB port  
Mac computers  
Mac OS X version 10.3 or later  
128MB of total memory (RAM)  
190MB of free hard disk space  
CD drive  
Available USB port  
28  
Section 1C: Synchronizing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                               
Upgrading From Another Palm OS® by ACCESS Device  
If you are setting up your first Palm OS® by ACCESS device, skip ahead to  
Note:  
You can transfer all compatible applications and information from your previous Palm OS  
device to your new Palm Centro™ smart device. This includes your calendar events,  
contacts, memos, and tasks, as well as your application settings and any compatible  
third-party applications and files.  
When you install Palm Desktop software, some third-party applications may be  
quarantined because they are not compatible with the Palm OS software version 5.4.9 on  
your new Centro device. Quarantined files are not installed on your device, nor are they  
deleted; these files are placed in a new folder on your computer: C:\Program  
Files\Palm\<device name>\PalmOS5 Incompatible Apps. (On some systems, Palm may be  
replaced with palmOne or Handspring.)  
Some third-party utilities allow you to back up your old device’s  
information onto an expansion card and then transfer the information  
to your Centro device. We do not recommend this method, because any  
incompatible applications are also transferred.  
Note:  
1. Calculate how much space your applications and information occupy on your previous  
Palm OS device:  
Press the Applications icon, and then press Menu  
Select Info on the App menu.  
.
At the bottom of the screen, select Size.  
Section 1C: Synchronizing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
29  
                                               
Look at the numbers on the Free Space line and subtract  
the number on the left from the number on the right to  
calculate the space used. For example, on the device  
shown here, 22.4 - 17.5 = 4.9. This means that 4.9MB of  
space is occupied on this device.  
2. If the space occupied on your old device is 64MB or less, go to  
step 3. If the space occupied is greater than 64MB, then do any  
of the following to free up some space before you go to the  
next step:  
Delete any third-party applications that you no longer use.  
Move large files, such as images, to an expansion card.  
Move third-party applications to an expansion card.  
Purge old information in applications such as Calendar (Date Book), Tasks (To Do),  
and email. Refer to the documentation that came with your old device for  
instructions on these items.  
3. Synchronize your old device with your old desktop software to back up your  
information one last time.  
4. Connect your new smart device to your computer (see “Connecting Your  
5. Install the new desktop synchronization software from the Palm Software Installation  
Do not synchronize your new Centro smart device by Palm with any  
previous versions of Palm Desktop software.  
Important:  
6. During the installation process, synchronize your new Centro device with your new  
desktop synchronization software as instructed. When prompted, do the following:  
Connect your new device to your computer (see “Connecting Your  
30  
Section 1C: Synchronizing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Indicate whether you want to sync all applications or only PIM (personal  
information management) applications.  
Select a device name for your new device; be sure to select the same name that  
you used for your old device. (This is the name that appears in the User list in  
Palm Desktop software.)  
7. (Mac users only) If you have pictures on your old device, copy them from your old  
device to an expansion card or beam them to your new Centro device.  
8. If you plan to continue using your old device, perform a hard reset to remove its  
associated device name. (See the documentation that came with your old device for  
instructions on performing a hard reset.) Each device you synchronize with your  
computer must have a unique name. The next time you synchronize your old device  
with your computer, be sure to assign it a new name.  
If any third-party applications are quarantined during the installation, do not manually  
install any of the quarantined files. Contact the third-party developer for software updates  
and information about compatibility with your new device.  
Section 1C: Synchronizing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
31  
                 
Installing the Desktop Synchronization Software  
Even if you already own a Palm OS® by ACCESS device and have installed a previous version  
of the desktop software, you must install the software from the Palm Software Installation  
CD that comes with your Centro smart device by Palm.  
If you are installing the software on a computer at work, make sure your  
company allows you to install new software. Contact your company’s IT  
department for help.  
Note:  
Installing the Desktop Software on a Windows or Mac Computer  
1. Close any applications that are currently running on your computer, including those  
that are minimized. Your computer must have all its resources available to install the  
software.  
2. Insert the Palm Software Installation CD into the CD drive on your computer.  
3. If you are installing the software on a Mac, double-click the CD icon on the desktop,  
and then double-click the PalmSoftware.pkg icon.  
32  
Section 1C: Synchronizing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
4. When the installation wizard opens, follow the onscreen instructions. Please note  
these important points about the installation process:  
(Windows only) You can choose which desktop software you want to use for  
synchronization: Palm Desktop software or Microsoft Outlook. (Microsoft Outlook  
desktop software sold separately. Microsoft Outlook synchronization conduit  
included.)  
If you use Microsoft Outlook as your desktop email application, select  
Microsoft Outlook as your desktop synchronization software. If you  
select Microsoft Outlook, Palm Desktop software is still installed on your  
computer. When you enter information on your computer, be sure to  
enter your information in Microsoft Outlook, not in Palm Desktop  
software.  
Note:  
When the install process prompts you to connect your device to your computer, go  
If you want to sync information with applications other than  
Palm Desktop or Microsoft Outlook, you need to purchase additional  
third-party sync software. This sync software is sometimes called a  
conduit.  
Tip:  
Section 1C: Synchronizing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
33  
                     
Connecting Your Palm Centro™ Smart Device to Your Computer  
1. Plug the AC charger into a wall outlet.  
2. Plug the USB sync cable into an available USB port or a powered USB hub on your  
computer.  
3. With the sync button facing up, connect the sync cable to the bottom of your device.  
Do not press the sync button until you are instructed to do so.  
4. Connect the charger cable to the charger jack.  
Sync Button  
Sync Cable  
Charger  
Cable  
You are now ready to synchronize. Go to “Synchronizing Information—The Basics” on the  
next page.  
34  
Section 1C: Synchronizing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Synchronizing Information—The Basics  
Synchronizing means that information that is entered or updated in one place (your device  
or your computer) is automatically updated in the other, so there’s no need to enter the  
information twice. We strongly recommend that you synchronize your Centro device with  
your computer or corporate server frequently to keep your information up-to-date (and  
backed up) in both locations.  
To sync your information, you must install the software from the Palm  
Software Installation CD that came with your Centro smart device  
by Palm—even if you sync with Outlook or another third-party  
page 32 for instructions.  
Important:  
Information from all the following applications is updated by default each time you  
synchronize your device with your desktop software:  
You can also set up the VersaMail® application to synchronize email on  
your device with email on your computer. See the VersaMail application  
User Guide located on your Palm Software Installation CD, or visit  
go.palm.com/centro-sprint/ for more information.  
Tip:  
Section 1C: Synchronizing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
35  
                   
How each application syncs depends on your computer type and the desktop software you  
are using, as follows:  
Computer  
Desktop  
What Syncs and Where  
Windows  
Outlook  
Calendar, Contacts, Memos, and  
Tasks sync with Outlook.  
Pics&Videos syncs with  
Palm Desktop software.  
Windows  
Mac  
Palm Desktop software All applications sync with  
Palm Desktop.  
Palm Desktop software All applications sync with  
Palm Desktop.  
You can download a trial version of Microsoft Outlook and learn about  
discount offers by visiting: go.palm.com/centro-sprint/.  
Tip:  
Tip:  
For information on locating your pictures and videos on your computer,  
1. Connect your Centro device to your computer as described in “Connecting Your  
If you’re performing initial setup, your device should already be  
connected to your computer.  
Note:  
36  
Section 1C: Synchronizing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
2. Press the sync button on the sync cable.  
Sync Button  
A message indicates that synchronization is in progress.  
3. Wait for a message that indicates that the process is complete before you disconnect  
the sync cable.  
If you have any problems synchronizing, see “Synchronization” on  
page 311 for troubleshooting suggestions.  
Tip:  
If you’re finishing your initial setup, you now have the option to install bonus software from  
go.palm.com/centro-sprint/. If you choose to install some of the bonus software, you need  
to sync again to install the software on your device. To install bonus software later, see  
For more synchronization options, including customizing which  
Note:  
Section 1C: Synchronizing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
37  
     
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 2  
Getting To Know Your  
Palm Centro™ Smart Device  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 2A  
Moving Around on Your Smart Device  
In This Section  
Section 2A: Moving Around  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
41  
   
Moving Around the Device Screen  
To move around the screen on your Palm Centro™ smart device, you can use the 5-way  
navigator  
for one-handed navigation, or you can tap items on the screen with the  
stylus. With use, you can find your own favorite way to scroll, highlight, and select menu  
items.  
Some third-party applications may not work with the 5-way, and you  
must use the stylus instead. In this guide, arrow icons are used to  
indicate directions on the 5-way. These arrows are different from any  
onscreen scroll arrows or pick-list arrows.  
Note:  
The 5-way  
includes Right , Left , Up , Down , and Center  
buttons.  
Up  
Center  
Right  
Left  
Down  
Scrolling Through Screens  
As on a computer, you scroll on the Centro device to move from field to field or page to  
page, or in some cases to highlight an item or option in a list.  
42  
Section 2A: Moving Around  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
The behavior of the 5-way  
for list screens and entry screens varies by application. Here  
are some general scrolling tips that apply to most applications:  
Press Right , Left , Up , and Down  
on the 5-way  
to move to the next field,  
button, or action in that direction.  
In list screens, press and hold Up  
Press Option and Up or Down  
or Down  
to scroll one screen at a time.  
Scroll Arrows  
to scroll to the  
next page of information within the current record (see  
When inside a text field, press Right or Left to scroll  
to the next character or word, and press Up  
Down to scroll between lines.  
or  
You can also scroll using the stylus. Tap an onscreen scroll  
arrow, or drag the slider of an onscreen scroll bar.  
Scroll Bar  
Highlighting and Selecting Items  
On most screens, one item—a button, a list entry, or a check  
box—is highlighted by default. The highlight identifies which item is affected by your next  
action. Use the 5-way  
to move the highlight from one item to another before opening  
or selecting it.  
The highlight can take one of two forms, depending on what is highlighted:  
Border glow: When an onscreen button (OK, Cancel, etc.) or pick list  
is highlighted, the button acquires a glow around its border.  
Colored background: When a phone number, text, an email  
address, or a Web link is highlighted, the item appears as white text  
against a colored background.  
After highlighting an item, you can select or activate it by pressing Center  
or by tapping  
the item with the stylus.  
Section 2A: Moving Around  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
Highlighting Text  
You can use the stylus to highlight text on the screen.  
Tap and drag the stylus across the text you want to highlight.  
To highlight a word, double-tap it.  
To highlight a paragraph, triple-tap it.  
Accessing Command Buttons  
In most applications, command buttons such as New, OK, and Details appear at the bottom  
of the screen. In many cases, you can jump directly to these buttons instead of scrolling to  
them. The 5-way  
controls vary according to the application, but here are some general  
rules that apply to most applications:  
From a list screen, such as the Contacts list or Memos list, press Right or Down  
jump to the first button.  
to  
From a screen where you create or edit entries, such as Edit Contacts, press Center  
to jump to the first button.  
From a dialog box, such as Edit Categories, press Up , Down , Right , or Left to  
scroll to the buttons.  
Selecting Menu Items  
Many applications have menus to provide access to additional  
features. These menus are usually hidden from view, but they  
appear when you press Menu  
. To get the most out of your  
device, it’s a good idea to familiarize yourself with the additional  
features available through the various application menus.  
1. Press Menu  
2. Press Right and Left to switch between menus.  
3. Press Up and Down to highlight a menu item.  
to open an application’s menus.  
Menu Shortcut  
44  
Section 2A: Moving Around  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                             
4. Press Center  
to select the menu item, or press Menu  
to close the menus and  
cancel your selection.  
Most menu items have menu shortcuts listed in the menu. To use a  
menu shortcut, press Menu plus the shortcut letter. You don’t have to  
Tip:  
see the menu item to use the menu shortcut. For example, when you’re  
in Calendar, you can press Menu + N to create a new event.  
Selecting Options in a Pick List  
A range of options is often presented in a type of menu called a pick list, which can be  
identified by a downward-pointing arrow. Pick lists are different from the application  
menus previously described. The application menus give you access to additional features,  
and pick lists enable you to select the contents for a particular field.  
You can select an option from a pick list with the 5-way  
or the stylus:  
Use the 5-way  
to highlight the pick list, and then press Center  
to display the  
to highlight the item you want, and then  
items in the list. Press Up  
and Down  
press Center  
to select the highlighted item. To exit the pick list without making a  
selection, press Left or Right  
.
Use your stylus to tap the pick list, and then tap the item you want from the list. To exit  
the pick list without making a selection, tap outside the list.  
Section 2A: Moving Around  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
45  
                 
Using the Keyboard  
When using the keyboard, most people find it easiest to hold the device with two hands  
and use the tips of both thumbs to press the keys.  
Backlight  
Backspace  
Option  
Return  
Menu  
Shift/Find  
Space  
Alt  
The Backspace, Return, Space, and Shift keys, as well as the letter keys, work in the same  
way as do those found on any computer keyboard. In addition, your device offers several  
special function keys.  
46  
Section 2A: Moving Around  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Key  
Function  
Option  
When pressed in conjunction with a second key, gives that key  
an alternate function. For example:  
Option + <any lettered key> enters the symbol or number  
displayed at the top of the key.  
Option + <any quick button> opens a secondary application  
Option + Shift/Find  
opens the Find feature (see “Using  
Option + Menu  
dims the device screen.  
Alt  
When pressed in conjunction with a second key, displays a  
variety of alternate characters that can be entered using that  
page 49 for details.  
Menu  
page 44 for details.  
The Centro smart device by Palm includes a keyboard backlight that  
turns on and off when the screen turns on or off. Press Option + P to  
adjust screen and keyboard backlight brightness. You can also set the  
backlight to dim or turn off when an active call lasts longer than a  
to adjust the automatic shut-off and dimming intervals.  
Tip:  
Section 2A: Moving Around  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
47  
           
Entering Lowercase and Uppercase Letters  
To enter lowercase letters, press the desired keys.  
To enter an uppercase letter, press Shift/Find  
, and then press a letter key. You don’t  
need to press and hold Shift/Find  
active, an up arrow appears in the lower-right corner of the screen.  
To turn Caps Lock on, press Shift/Find twice. To turn it off, press Shift/Find  
appears in the lower-right corner of  
while entering uppercase letters. When Shift is  
once.  
When Caps Lock is on, an underlined up arrow  
the screen.  
Entering Numbers, Punctuation, and Symbols  
Numbers, punctuation, and symbols appear above the letters on  
the keys. To enter these characters, do one of the following:  
Symbol  
Letter  
Press Option , and then press the key with the desired  
character shown above the letter. You don’t need to press and  
hold Option  
while pressing the second key. When Option is active, the symbol  
appears in the lower-right corner of the screen.  
To turn Option Lock on, press Option  
twice. To turn it off, press Option  
once.  
When Option Lock is on, the symbol  
appears in the lower-right corner of the screen.  
Some application views automatically default to Option Lock, such as  
the Dial Pad view of the Phone application, or the Calculator. In this case,  
you do not need to press Option to enter numbers.  
Tip:  
48  
Section 2A: Moving Around  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Entering Other Symbols and Accented Characters  
Symbols and accented characters that do not appear on the keyboard are sometimes called  
alternate characters because you use the Alt  
key to enter them.  
1. Enter the character that corresponds to the symbol or accented character you want.  
(See the table on the next page.)  
2. Press Alt  
.
3. Press Up , Down , Right , or Left to highlight the desired character.  
4. Press Center  
to insert the character.  
To see a list of additional alternate characters, position the cursor at the  
beginning of the line or after a space, and then press Alt. The alternate  
characters are grouped by their similarity to the base key. For example,  
the alternate characters available for the e key are é, è, ë, and ê.  
Tip:  
Section 2A: Moving Around  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
49  
               
Symbols and Accented Characters  
Press …  
Press …  
Then press to select …  
Then press to select …  
a
á à ä â ã å æ  
Á À Ä Â Ã Å Æ  
ß
S
ß Š  
§
A
t or T  
b or B  
u
ú ù ü û  
Ù Ú Ü Û  
× ¤  
c
C
e
E
i
ç ¢ ©  
U
Ç ¢ ©  
x or X  
è é ë ê  
È É Ë Ê  
ì í ï î  
y
ý ÿ  
Y
Ý Ÿ  
0 1 2 3 4 5 6  
7 8 9 . , ‘ “ @  
+ - * / # ( or )  
; _ • \ % =  
÷
£ ¥ ¢ [ ]  
°
I
Ì Í Ï Î  
{ } < > « » © ® ™ ^ Ø |  
l or L  
£
!
¡
n
ñ
?
:
¿
N
Ñ
; :-) :-( ;-)  
o
ò ó ö ô œ õ  
$
£ ¥  
¢
O
Ò Ó Ö Ô Œ Õ  
p or P  
r or R  
s
®
ß š  
50  
Section 2A: Moving Around  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Opening Applications  
When you open an application using either a quick button or Applications view, you  
automatically close the application you were previously using.  
Using the Quick Buttons  
The front of the Centro device has three buttons that you can use to open applications. The  
fourth button opens Applications view, which allows you to open all the applications on  
Applications  
Messaging  
Phone  
Calendar  
Each of the three application quick buttons can be used to open two applications. To open a  
button’s primary application—as indicated by the graphic on the button—simply press the  
button. To open a button’s secondary application, press Option , and then press the  
quick button.  
Pressing any of the quick buttons or the Applications button  
automatically wakes up your device screen. See “Waking Up the Screen”  
Note:  
Button  
Primary Application  
Secondary Application  
Phone  
+
+
+
Web  
Calendar  
World Clock  
Email  
Messaging  
Section 2A: Moving Around  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
51  
                             
You can also customize the buttons. See “Customizing Device Buttons”  
on page 283 for details.  
Tip:  
Using Applications View  
You can access all available applications through Applications view.  
1. Press Applications  
.
2. Use the 5-way  
to highlight the application you want to  
open.  
3. Press Center  
to open the selected application.  
In Applications view, you can also do any of the following:  
Press Applications  
repeatedly to cycle through various  
more information on categories.  
Enter the first few letters of the application’s name to highlight it. For example, if you  
enter “p,” it highlights Phone; if you then enter “r,” it highlights Prefs. If you pause and  
then enter “r,” it highlights the first application that starts with “r.”  
You can also press and hold Applications from any screen on your device  
Tip:  
to select from a list of your most recently used applications.  
52  
Section 2A: Moving Around  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Turning Your Device On and Off  
Throughout this guide the term device is used to describe your  
Note:  
Palm Centro™ smart device and its physical attributes. The term phone is  
used to describe the feature of your smart device that enables you to  
connect to the Sprint National Network.  
You can turn on your device screen and your phone independently. For example, the device  
screen can be off while the phone is on, or the device screen can be on while the phone is  
off. You can also have both the device screen and the phone turned on or off at the same  
time.  
Waking Up the Screen  
When your device screen is off, you need to wake up the screen.  
1. Press and release Power/End  
to wake up the screen.  
Power/End  
Center  
2. Press Center  
to turn off Keyguard. For more information about turning Keyguard  
3. Press and release Power/End  
to turn off the screen.  
You can also press any of the application quick buttons on the front of  
your device to wake up the screen and to go directly to the application  
associated with that button.  
Note:  
54  
Section 2B: Phone Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Turning Your Device’s Phone On and Off  
When your phone is on, it is connected to the Sprint National Network (provided you are in  
a coverage area), so that you can make and receive phone calls and use wireless services,  
such as email, messaging, and the Web browser. During initial setup, your phone is on by  
default, so you can use wireless services right away.  
If you turn off your phone, you can still use the organizer features such as Contacts and  
Calendar, as well as the media features such as the Pocket Tunes music application and  
Pics&Videos. This is sometimes referred to as flight mode and is ideal for using your device  
on airplanes and for maximizing battery life.  
1. Wake up the screen.  
2. Press and hold Power/End . (You hear a series of ascending tones and see a  
“Welcome” screen. When your device locates a signal, “Sprint” and the  
signal-strength  
icon appear at the top of the Phone application screen, indicating  
that you can use the phone and Internet features, if they are supported by the local  
network.)  
3. Press and hold Power/End again to turn off your phone. (You hear a series of  
descending tones and see a “Powering off” screen. When your phone is off, “Phone  
Off” appears at the top of the Phone application screen. You can still use the  
nonwireless features of your device, such as Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, and Memos.)  
Section 2B: Phone Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
55  
                         
Opening the Phone Application  
Press Phone  
to open the Main view of the Phone application.  
Status Icons  
Dial Pad  
Favorite Buttons  
56  
Section 2B: Phone Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Making Calls  
Your Palm Centro™ smart device offers several options for making phone calls. As you  
become familiar with your device, you’ll discover which method you prefer.  
Dialing Using the Onscreen Dial Pad  
1. Press Phone  
.
2. Enter the phone numbers by tapping the onscreen Dial Pad  
with the stylus.  
3. Tap Dial, press Talk , or press Center  
to dial.  
If you changed the wallpaper in the Main view of the Phone application  
you can still access the Dial Pad. From the Main view of the Phone  
application, press Talk and then select Dial Pad.  
Note:  
Tip:  
You can paste numbers directly into Main view. Copy a number from  
another application, and then press Phone to switch to Main view. Open  
the Edit menu, and then select Paste. Press Talk to dial.  
Section 2B: Phone Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
57  
                     
Dialing From the Keyboard  
1. Press Phone  
.
2. Press the numbered keys to enter the phone  
number. (You don’t need to press Option .)  
3. Press Talk  
to dial.  
Dialing by Contact Name  
Before you can dial a call by contact name, you must  
Charactersyouenter  
appear here  
1. Press Phone  
.
2. Select the Contacts favorite button.  
3. Using the keyboard, start entering one of the following for  
the contact you want to call:  
First name (JOH for John).  
Last name (SMI for Smith).  
First initial and last name (JSM for John Smith).  
For example, entering SM might display Smilla Anderson, John  
Smith, and Sally Martin. Entering JSM finds only John Smith.  
4. Select the number you want to call, and press Talk  
to dial.  
To see more information for a contact, highlight the name and press  
Center on the 5-way. To restart your search, press Backspace to delete  
letters you’ve entered, or select Cancel to return to Main view.  
Tip:  
58  
Section 2B: Phone Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Dialing With a Speed-Dial Favorite Button  
Your device comes with a few predefined speed-dial favorite  
buttons, but you can also create your own favorites. See “Creating a  
1. Press Phone  
2. Press Down to access your favorite buttons.  
3. Use the 5-way to highlight the desired speed-dial  
favorite button. (Speed-dial favorite buttons are indicated by  
the icon.)  
.
4. Press Center  
or tap the speed-dial favorite button to dial the number associated  
with the selected button.  
To view more favorite buttons, press Right or Down on the 5-way. If the  
Tip:  
highlighted favorite was added from Contacts, press Space to view all  
numbers associated with that contact.  
Dialing From a Web Page or Message  
Your device recognizes most phone numbers that appear on Web  
pages or in text, email, or Sprint Picture MailSM messages. If you  
can’t use the 5-way or stylus to highlight and dial a phone number  
on a Web page or in a message, it means that your device doesn’t  
recognize the number as a phone number.  
1. Select the phone number on the Web page or in the message.  
2. Press Center  
to open the Dial Number dialog box.  
3. Select Dial to dial the number.  
Section 2B: Phone Features  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
Redialing a Recently Called Number  
From the Main view in the Phone application, press and hold Talk  
to dial the last  
number you called.  
–or–  
To select from your most recently dialed numbers, from the Main view in the Phone  
application, press Talk  
to open the Redial list, select the number you want to call,  
and then press Talk  
again to dial.  
–or–  
To select from a chronological list of calls, select the Call Log favorite button. You can  
also access the Call Log from the Main view in the Phone application by pressing Talk  
and selecting Call Log from the Redial list.  
60  
Section 2B: Phone Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Receiving Calls  
To receive calls, your device’s phone must be on. This is different from having only the  
phone is off, your calls go to voicemail.  
Answering Calls  
Press Talk  
.
–or–  
Using the 5-way  
, select the onscreen Answer button.  
–or–  
If the headset is attached, press the headset button.  
To prevent calls from accidentally being answered while the device is in a  
Tip:  
pocket or briefcase, you can disable the screen’s touch-sensitive feature  
when an incoming call arrives (see “Locking Your Screen” on page 290).  
Sending Calls to Voicemail  
Press Power/End  
.
–or–  
Using the 5-way  
, select the onscreen Ignore button.  
–or–  
Using the 5-way  
, select the onscreen Ignore with Text button. This option sends  
the call to voicemail and opens a text message addressed to the caller.  
Do not press Power/End to ignore a call-waiting alert; this hangs up your  
current call (the call-waiting alert then changes to an incoming call  
alert). Use the 5-way method instead.  
Tip:  
Section 2B: Phone Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
61  
                     
Silencing the Ring of an Incoming Call  
Press any key on your device except Talk , Power/End , or Center  
.
–or–  
To immediately silence all system sounds including the ringer, slide the Ringer switch to  
If music is playing and a call arrives, the phone rings softly and the music automatically  
pauses. The music resumes if you ignore the call or, if you answer the call, the music  
resumes when you hang up.  
62  
Section 2B: Phone Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Using Voicemail  
Setting Up Your Voicemail  
Your voicemail number is preset when you activate your device. The first time you call  
voicemail, you are prompted to enter your voicemail password. If necessary, please contact  
Sprint for your password and enter it as prompted.  
1. Make sure your phone is turned on (see “Turning Your Device’s  
2. Press Phone  
.
3. Select the Voicemail favorite button to dial the automated  
voicemail system.  
4. Follow the voice prompts to set up your voicemail.  
You can also press and hold 1 to dial voicemail from the Main view of the  
Phone application, Dial Pad, or Favorites.  
Tip:  
Voicemail Notification  
When you have a new voicemail message, you are notified with an  
Alert screen. To respond to the Alert screen, select OK to dismiss the  
alert or select Listen to play the message. When you have messages  
that you have not listened to, the Voicemail  
icon also appears in  
the title bar at the top of the Main view in the Phone application.  
Section 2B: Phone Features  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
Retrieving Your Voicemail Messages  
1. Press Phone  
.
2. Press and hold 1 to dial the voicemail system, or select the Voicemail favorite button.  
3. Enter your voicemail password by using the keyboard, or select Extra Digits if you  
defining extra digits). Remember that you do not need to press Option  
to enter  
numbers, an asterisk (*), or a pound sign (#) during a call.  
If the Voicemail icon appears in the title bar of the Main view of the  
Tip:  
Phone application, you can select this icon to retrieve your voicemail.  
Accessing Your Voicemail From Another Phone  
1. Dial your wireless phone number.  
2. Press * when your voicemail answers.  
3. Enter your password, and then press #.  
Displaying Numeric Pages  
If an incoming call goes to voicemail, the caller can choose to enter their phone number as  
a numeric page instead of leaving a voicemail message. When someone pages you, the  
page is displayed on the Alert screen. If there is just one alert, the page  
icon is a phone  
with a bubble on it. If there are multiple alerts, the messaging  
icon appears instead.  
1. From the Alert screen, highlight an item with an alert icon.  
2. Select Go To to view the page in the Messaging application. The page displays the  
caller’s phone number.  
64  
Section 2B: Phone Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
What Can I Do When I’m On a Call?  
When you make or receive a call, Active Call view appears. Use the 5-way  
to access the  
onscreen buttons in this view.  
CurrentDuration  
of Call  
Dial Pad  
Caller’s Name  
and Number  
Mute  
The onscreen buttons in Active Call view perform the following functions:  
Ends the call immediately. You can also press the headset button  
(if the headset is attached).  
Turns on the speakerphone. When the speakerphone is on, you can  
take the device away from your ear and use other features during a call.  
For example, you can check your calendar or look up contact  
information.  
Turns off the speakerphone when it is on.  
Replaces the Spkr-phone button when a Bluetooth® hands-free device  
such as a headset or car kit is attached. Select this button to transfer  
the call from the Bluetooth hands-free device to the built-in earpiece.  
Section 2B: Phone Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
65  
                     
Places the current call on hold.  
Enables you to place another call while the first call is on hold. For  
information on handling a second outgoing call, see “Making a Second  
Opens the Dial Pad so you can manually dial additional numbers, such  
as an extension or a response to a voice prompt.  
Dials any extra digits (such as a password or an extension) that you  
assigned to a favorite button. This button replaces the Dial Pad button  
during outgoing calls to numbers that include predefined extra digits.  
extra digits.  
Mutes the microphone so that you cannot be heard.  
To avoid accidentally pressing onscreen buttons while holding the device  
to your ear, you can disable the screen’s touch-sensitive feature during  
Tip:  
Ending a Call  
Do one of the following to end a call:  
Press Power/End  
.
Select Hang Up All.  
Press the button on the headset (if the headset is attached).  
66  
Section 2B: Phone Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                             
When a call lasts longer than two minutes, the screen dims or turns off  
(see “Optimizing Power Settings” on page 287). Press any key except  
Power/End to wake up the screen, and then press Power/End to hang up  
the call. Be careful not to accidentally press Power/End to wake up the  
screen, because this ends the call.  
Tip:  
Switching Applications During a Call  
You can use many other applications on your device, including the organizer and text  
messaging features, while holding a phone conversation. You cannot, however, make a data  
connection while on a call. This means that you cannot browse the Web or send and receive  
email or Picture Mail messages while on a call.  
1. Do one of the following:  
Select Hold.  
Select Spkr-phone to continue the conversation while you view the other  
application.  
Connect a headset (see “Using a Phone Headset” on page 79).  
2. Press Applications  
.
3. Select the icon for the application you want to open.  
4. Complete the task in the application.  
5. Press Phone  
to return to Active Call view.  
If youd like to continue talking while viewing another application, select  
Spkr-phone before you switch to the other application. If you’re using a  
headset, you can skip this step.  
Tip:  
Section 2B: Phone Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
67  
               
Saving Phone Numbers  
After you complete an outgoing call to a number that is not in your Contacts list, you are  
prompted to add the number to your Contacts list. You are also prompted to add new  
numbers from incoming calls with caller ID.  
To create a new contact entry for this number, select Create a  
New Contact, and enter the contact’s information.  
To add this number to an existing contact entry, select Add to a  
Contact, and then select the contact. The number is pasted into  
the first available phone number field for that contact.  
To decline adding this number, select Cancel.  
To disable the Add New Number prompt, check the Don’t ask  
me this again box.  
You can reenable the Add New Number prompt if you’ve disabled it. In  
the Phone application, press Menu and select Phone Preferences. Check  
the Ask to add unknown phone numbers after calls box.  
Tip:  
If you don’t add a number right away, follow these steps to add it later:  
number you want to save.  
2. Press Menu  
.
3. Select Add Contact.  
4. Enter the information for the entry.  
5. Select Done.  
68  
Section 2B: Phone Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Making a Second Call  
You can make a second call while your first call is still active.  
1. Dial the first number and wait until the person answers.  
2. Use the 5-way  
to select Hold.  
3. Use the 5-way  
to select Add Call.  
4. Dial the second number using any of the methods described  
5. When the Dial another call? prompt appears,  
select Yes.  
Active Call view now includes two status lines, each representing one of  
Tip:  
the calls. You can join the two calls in a conference call by selecting Conf,  
or finish the second call and return to the first call, but you cannot  
switch between the two calls.  
6. Press Power/End  
to end both calls. To return to the first call, wait for the second  
call to hang up.  
Answering a Second Call (Call Waiting)  
When you are on a call, you can receive a second call. When the second call comes in, you  
hear a call-waiting tone and the Call Waiting dialog box appears. You can do any of the  
following to handle the second call:  
To place the current call on hold and answer the new call, press Talk or use the 5-way  
to select Answer.  
To send the new call to voicemail, use the 5-way  
to select Ignore.  
Section 2B: Phone Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
69  
                             
To send the new call to voicemail and send the caller a text message, use the 5-way  
to select Ignore with Text.  
To hang up the current call and answer the new call, press Power/End . When the  
incoming call message reappears, select Answer or press Talk  
.
Once you have answered a second call, to switch back and forth between  
Tip:  
the original call and the call you answered, use the 5-way to select Swap.  
When you answer a second call and then select Hang Up All, it ends both  
calls. In this situation, if the first caller has not yet hung up the phone,  
the Sprint National Network automatically redials your number from the  
first caller’s number and you see an incoming call alert. You can answer  
to continue your call with the first caller.  
Note:  
Making a Conference Call Using Three-Way Calling  
You can join two calls in a conference session by using three-way calling. Normal airtime  
rates apply for each of the two calls.  
1. When your first call is active, place a second call (see “Making a Second Call” on  
page 69). (You cannot initiate a three-way call if the second call is an incoming call.)  
2. When you’re connected to the second party, use the 5-way  
to select Conf to  
begin your three-way call.  
70  
Section 2B: Phone Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
If one of the people you called hangs up, you and the remaining caller  
stay connected. The screen does not change to indicate that one of the  
callers has hung up. You cannot switch between callers, but you can still  
speak to the remaining caller. If you initiated the call and are the first to  
hang up, all three callers are disconnected.  
Note:  
Tip:  
You can also use Flash mode to connect to multiple callers. See “Using  
3. To end the three-way call, press Power/End or select Hang Up All.  
Call Forwarding  
You can forward calls to another number. You can still make calls from your device while  
call forwarding is activated. There is an additional per-call charge for this service. When call  
forwarding is active, an icon appears in the title bar of the Phone application’s Main view.  
1. Press Phone  
.
2. Press Menu  
.
Section 2B: Phone Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
71  
         
3. Select Options, and then select Phone Preferences.  
4. Select the Call forward pick list.  
If the forwarding number appears in the pick list, select  
the number.  
If the forwarding number does not appear in the pick list,  
select Edit numbers, and then select New. Enter a 10-digit  
forwarding number without spaces, and select OK. Then  
select the number from the Call forward pick list.  
5. Select OK.  
6. Call your Centro device to confirm that call forwarding is active.  
7. To turn off call forwarding, select the Call forward pick list and select Off.  
Didyouknow?  
You can also turn call forwarding on by dialing *72 followed by  
the number where you want to forward your calls, and then  
press Talk. For example: *72 415-555-1234 and then press  
Talk. When you’re ready to turn off call forwarding, enter *720  
and then press Talk.  
72  
Section 2B: Phone Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Using Flash Mode  
Flash mode provides an alternate way to manage your calls while one or more calls are  
active. For example, you can dial another call, swap between calls, or join two calls in a  
conference session with the press of a button while in Flash mode.  
1. Press Talk  
from Active Call view.  
2. If the Do you want to switch to Flash mode? prompt appears,  
select Yes.  
3. While in Flash mode, do any of the following:  
If you have one call in progress and you answer an  
incoming second call, press Talk  
to swap between the  
calls.  
If you have one call in progress, to make an outgoing  
second call, dial the number using any of the methods described in “Making Calls”  
If you have one call in progress and you place an outgoing second call, press  
Talk  
after establishing a connection with the second party to set up a  
conference session using three-way calling.  
If you have two calls in conference, press Talk  
to hang up one of the calls; you  
can then dial another number and include the new caller in the conference  
session.  
Pressing Talk during a conference call usually hangs up the second call.  
However, depending on your network connection, you may occasionally  
hang up the first call.  
Note:  
4. To exit Flash mode and end all the calls, press Power/End  
.
Section 2B: Phone Features  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Using Sprint Voice Command  
If you subscribe to the Sprint Voice Commandservice, you can call a number by just saying a  
name. (There is a monthly charge for this service.)  
To activate Sprint Voice Command, you must speak to a Sprint Customer  
Service representative:  
2. Press Phone  
.
3. Press *, press 2, and then press Talk to contact Sprint Customer Service and sign up.  
Setting Up Your Personal Address Book  
To use Sprint Voice Command, you must first set up your personal address book.  
1. From the Main view of the Phone application, press *, and then press Talk . Follow  
the system prompts. (You’ll hear a tone, followed by the prompt “Ready.”)  
2. Say Add Name” to begin setting up your Personal Address Book, and then follow the  
voice prompts.  
Making a Call With Sprint Voice Command  
1. From the Main view of the Phone application, press *, and then press Talk . (You’ll  
hear a tone followed by the prompt “Ready.”)  
2. After the prompt, say “Call” and the name you’ve assigned to the number you want to  
call. (Your request repeats and you are asked to verify it.)  
3. Say “Yes” to dial the call. Say “No” to cancel.  
74  
Section 2B: Phone Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Defining Favorite Buttons  
Your device provides 70 favorite buttons (69 programmable) for  
quick access to the following common tasks:  
Dialing a phone number (speed dial).  
Accessing your Call Log.  
Accessing the onscreen Dial Pad.  
Opening an application.  
Accessing a Web page.  
Addressing a text, email, or Picture Mail message.  
Accessing voicemail (preset on your device).  
Sprint presets favorite buttons on your device so that you can easily access your device’s  
wireless features. You can customize all favorite buttons except Voicemail—either delete  
and reassign existing favorite buttons or create new ones—to perform any of the  
supported tasks.  
For each favorite button, you can also set up a Quick Key that gives you instant access to  
the phone number or corresponding screen. Quick Keys are optional and can be letters only,  
except for the Voicemail Quick Key, which is preprogrammed as 1. The letter equivalent for  
that key is E, so you cannot assign E as a Quick Key to another favorite button.  
If you’re upgrading from a previous Palm device, your favorites might be  
transferred along with your other information. However, you may need  
to rearrange the order in which your favorite buttons appear by pressing  
Menu, selecting Record, and then selecting Edit Favorites Pages.  
Tip:  
Section 2B: Phone Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
75  
                         
Creating a Speed-Dial Favorite Button  
1. Press Phone  
.
2. Use the 5-way  
to select a blank favorite button.  
If there are no blank favorite buttons on the current Favorites page, press  
Right on the 5-way to scroll through the other pages. If you run out of  
blank favorite buttons, you can delete some existing favorites to make  
Tip:  
3. Enter a label for the favorite.  
If the entry is for an existing contact, select Lookup. Start  
entering the contact’s last name, and then select the  
number you want for the contact when it appears in the  
lookup list.  
If the entry is for a new contact, enter the Label, press  
Down , and enter the Number.  
4. (Optional) Enter a Quick Key, a letter that you can press and  
hold from the Main, Dial Pad, or Favorites view of the Phone application, to dial this  
speed-dial number.  
5. (Optional) Select More, and then select advanced options:  
Extra Digits lets you define additional digits to dial, such as a password or  
extension. To enter a one-second pause, insert a comma between digits. To add a  
longer pause, enter more commas.  
Dial Extra Digits automatically dials predefined extra digits immediately after  
dialing the phone number, when checked.  
6. Select OK.  
76  
Section 2B: Phone Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                             
Creating Other Types of Favorite Buttons  
1. Press Phone  
.
2. Use the 5-way  
to select a blank favorite button.  
3. Select the Type pick list and select Call Log, Dial Pad, Contacts, Application, Message,  
Email, or Web Link.  
4. Enter a label for the favorite and enter any other necessary information on the screen.  
When creating a Message or Email favorite you can enter multiple  
addresses; simply separate each address with a comma. This is an easy  
way to send messages to a group of people.  
Tip:  
5. (Optional) Enter a Quick Key, a letter that you can press and hold from the Main, Dial  
Pad, or Favorites view of the Phone application, to open the favorite.  
6. Select OK.  
Editing or Deleting an Existing Favorite Button  
You can edit or delete most favorite buttons. You cannot edit or delete the preset Voicemail  
button, but you can add extra digits or move the Voicemail button to a different position.  
1. Press Phone  
.
2. Use the 5-way  
to access Favorites.  
3. Highlight the favorite button you want to edit or delete.  
4. Press Menu  
.
5. Select Edit Favorites Button on the Record menu.  
6. To edit the entry, make the desired changes. (For example, you can add a Quick Key  
shortcut to any favorite.) To delete the entry, select Delete.  
7. Select OK.  
Section 2B: Phone Features  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                     
You can also organize your favorite buttons on separate pages. Open the  
Record menu, and then select Edit Favorites Pages. To arrange your  
favorites, drag and drop the buttons into a new slot. To move a favorite  
to another page, drag the button onto the page icon at the bottom of  
the screen.  
Tip:  
78  
Section 2B: Phone Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using a Phone Headset  
You can connect a phone headset for hands-free operation. If you need to use your device  
while driving and this is permitted in your area, we recommend using a phone headset or a  
hands-free car kit (sold separately).  
In addition to the stereo headset, your device is compatible with the following types of  
headsets that are sold separately:  
Wired headsets with a 2.5mm connector (3-pin or 4-pin).  
Wireless headsets and car kits enabled with Bluetooth 1.1 or 1.2 wireless technology.  
For a list of compatible hands-free devices, go to  
Note:  
Check the specifications for your headset or car kit to confirm compatibility.  
Using a Wired Headset  
Headset  
Button  
Microphone  
Speakers  
Section 2B: Phone Features  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
When using a headset, you can press the headset button to perform any of the following  
tasks:  
Answer an incoming call or a call waiting call.  
Pick up a call that is on hold.  
Switch between two calls (if the second call is incoming).  
Join two calls in a conference (if the second call is outgoing).  
Hang up a single call.  
The headset designed for Treo 180, 270, and 300 devices is not  
compatible with your Centro smart device by Palm. Standard headsets  
sold with other Sprint phones are compatible with your device. If you  
hear a headset buzz or experience poor microphone performance, your  
headset may be incompatible with your device.  
Note:  
Connecting to a Bluetooth® Hands-Free Device  
Once you set up a partnership with a Bluetooth hands-free device such as a headset or car  
kit, you can communicate with that device whenever it is turned on and within range.  
Bluetooth range is up to 30 feet in optimum environmental conditions. Performance and  
range may be affected by physical obstacles, radio interference from nearby electronic  
equipment, and other factors.  
In the documentation for the other device, a partnership might be  
referred to by a term such as trusted pair, trusted device, or pairing.  
Note:  
80  
Section 2B: Phone Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
1. Press Applications  
and select Bluetooth  
, or tap the  
Bluetooth icon in the title bar.  
2. Select Bluetooth On.  
3. (Optional) Enter a device name that identifies your device  
when it is discovered by other Bluetooth devices.  
Use the same device name for all your Bluetooth connections. If you  
Note:  
change the device name, you need to recreate any partnerships you have  
already created.  
4. Prepare your hands-free device to accept a connection from another Bluetooth device.  
(For instructions, see the documentation that came with your hands-free device.)  
5. Select Setup Devices.  
6. Select Hands-free Setup.  
7. Follow the onscreen instructions to create a partnership with  
the specific hands-free device. When prompted, enter a  
passkey.  
Some hands-free devices have a predefined passkey. If your device has a  
predefined passkey, you can find it in the documentation for that device.  
Other devices provide a screen where you enter a passkey that you make  
up. In either case, you must use the same passkey on both your  
Important:  
Centro device and your hands-free device. We recommend that, where  
possible, you make up a passkey of 16 alphanumeric characters (letters  
and numerals only) to improve the security of your device. The longer the  
passkey, the more difficult it is for the passkey to be deciphered.  
Section 2B: Phone Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
81  
                       
8. After you finish setting up the device, select Done to return to Trusted Devices view.  
For some car kits, you need to initiate a Bluetooth connection from your  
Centro device to complete the partnership process. To do this, highlight  
the car kit in Trusted Devices view, press Menu, and then select Connect.  
Note:  
9. (Optional) Enable advanced hands-free features by pressing the multifunction button  
(MFB) on the hands-free device.  
You know that the connection is successful when you see a headset icon in the title bar  
of the Phone application. You can now use your device with the Bluetooth hands-free  
device such as a headset or car kit.  
Using a Bluetooth Hands-Free Device  
After you create a partnership with your Bluetooth hands-free device and you turn it on  
within range (up to 30 feet), your Centro device automatically routes all calls to the  
hands-free device instead of to the earpiece on your Centro device. When a call comes in,  
your Centro device rings and the hands-free device beeps. Even if you answer the call on  
your Centro device, the call goes to the hands-free device. If you prefer to route calls to the  
earpiece on your Centro device, you can change the settings on your device to do this (see  
82  
Section 2B: Phone Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
The features available on your hands-free device vary by model. Check the documentation  
for your hands-free device for details on the supported features and how to use those  
features. Your Centro device can support the following features, provided that your  
hands-free device also supports them:  
Answer an incoming call.  
Hang up a call and answer a call-waiting call.  
Place a call on hold and answer a call-waiting call.  
Hang up a single call.  
Transfer a call from the device’s earpiece to the hands-free device.  
Ignore an incoming call.  
Redial the last number you called from the hands-free device.  
View a log of recently received, missed, and dialed calls, and dial numbers for these calls  
directly from the hands-free device.  
Transfer speed-dial favorites and Contacts entries containing phone numbers from your  
device to the hands-free device phone book, up to the maximum number of entries  
allowed in your hands-free device’s phone book.  
Your device transfers speed-dial favorites first, and then contacts in  
alphabetical order up to the maximum number of entries allowed in  
your hands-free device’s phone book. So if you have important numbers  
that you want to show up in your hands-free device’s phone book, be  
sure to create speed-dial favorites for them before you transfer the  
numbers.  
Tip:  
Section 2B: Phone Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
83  
     
Customizing Advanced Settings for Your Hands-Free Device  
You can set whether your Bluetooth hands-free device automatically answers incoming  
calls, provided the device supports this feature.  
1. Press Applications  
2. Select Hands-Free.  
3. Do one of the following:  
and select Prefs  
.
To send all calls to the hands-free device: Check the Always route calls to  
Hands-Free box. Select the Auto answer pick list and select whether you want  
your hands-free device to automatically answer incoming calls and how quickly it  
answers.  
To choose between the earpiece on your device and your hands-free device on a  
call-by-call basis: Uncheck the Always route calls to Hands-Free box. When the  
phone rings, you can answer the call with your hands-free device by pressing the  
multifunction button on your hands-free device, or you can answer the call with  
4. Select Done.  
84  
Section 2B: Phone Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Customizing Phone Settings  
Customizing the Main View in the Phone Application  
Phone Display Options let you customize the appearance and text entry mode of the Main  
view in the Phone application.  
1. Press Phone  
.
2. Press Menu  
.
3. Select Options, and then select Phone Display Options.  
4. Set any of the following options:  
Show … sets whether the Dial Pad or wallpaper appears in  
the Main view of the Phone application. If you select Show  
Wallpaper, select the thumbnail image and then select an  
image to use as wallpaper.  
Typing … sets whether typing enters numbers in the Dial  
Pad or starts a contact search.  
If you choose to have typing start a contact search, you need to press  
Tip:  
Option to enter a number when dialing from the Dial Pad.  
Show Calendar event sets whether the current event from the Calendar  
application appears in the Main view of the Phone application. When this option  
is enabled, you can then select this event to jump to the Calendar application.  
Show Favorite buttons sets whether Favorites appear in the Main view of the  
Phone application.  
Rows sets the number of favorite button rows that appear in the Main view of the  
Phone application.  
5. Select OK.  
Section 2B: Phone Features  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                         
Selecting Ringtones  
You can set various tones for various types of incoming phone calls.  
You can download any compatible ringtone directly to your device (see  
ringtones to your computer and then email them to your device.  
Tip:  
1. Press Phone  
.
2. Press Menu  
.
3. Select Options, and then select Sound Preferences.  
4. Select the Application pick list, and then select Ring Tones.  
5. Select the Volume pick list, and then select the volume level.  
6. Select the Vibrate pick list, and then select when you want  
the vibrate option to turn on.  
7. (Optional) Check the Escalate ring tone volume box if you want the ring to play softly  
and then increase to full volume the longer it rings.  
8. Select ringtones from the following pick lists:  
Known Caller for an incoming call from someone in your Contacts or Favorites.  
Unknown Caller for an incoming call from someone identified by caller ID who is  
not in your Contacts or Favorites.  
Roaming for incoming calls when you’re outside the Sprint National Network.  
9. Select Done.  
You can also preview, delete, and send sounds on your device. Press  
Applications, select Sounds, and then select Manage. To play a sound,  
select it, and then press Center on the 5-way. To delete a sound, select it,  
Tip:  
and then press Backspace. To send a sound, select it, and then select Talk  
.
86  
Section 2B: Phone Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
Selecting Phone Alert Tones  
You can set various tones for various types of alerts.  
1. Press Phone  
.
2. Press Menu  
.
3. Select Options, and then select Sound Preferences.  
4. Select the Application pick list, and then select Phone Alerts.  
5. Select the Volume pick list, and then select the volume level.  
6. Select the Vibrate pick list, and then select when you want  
the vibrate option to turn on.  
7. Select options for when an alert should sound:  
Voicemail Alert to indicate when a new voicemail message has arrived.  
Coverage in/out to indicate if you’ve moved in or out of a coverage area.  
Signal faded to indicate if the network signal lost strength or disappeared and a  
call was dropped.  
8. Select Done.  
Section 2B: Phone Features  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Adjusting Call Volume  
While a call is in progress, press the Volume button on the side of your device to adjust  
the call volume.  
Volume Button  
Side Button  
Adjusting Ringer Volume  
When you are not on a call, press the Volume button on the side of your device to adjust  
the ringer volume, and then press the Side button to confirm the change.  
As you increase the volume to the maximum level, a high-volume warning  
message appears.  
Tip:  
88  
Section 2B: Phone Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Assigning a Caller ID Ringtone  
Caller ID ringtones can let you know who is calling before you even look at your device. This  
is a great way to keep track of calls from important people in your life and to screen calls  
you’d prefer not to answer.  
1. Press Phone  
.
2. Select the Contacts favorite button.  
3. Open the contact entry to which you want to assign a caller ID  
ringtone, and then select Edit.  
4. Select the Ringtone pick list and select a ringtone for this  
contact.  
5. Select Done.  
You can assign a ringtone to an entire category of contacts. For example,  
Tip:  
use a special ringtone for categories such as Family, Work, or Golf  
Buddies. Select the category pick list in the upper-right corner, select Edit  
Categories, and then select the category. Select the ringtone on the Edit  
Category screen.  
Assigning a Caller ID Picture  
1. Press Phone  
.
2. Select the Contacts favorite button.  
3. Open the contact entry to which you want to assign a caller ID  
picture, and then select Edit.  
4. Select the Picture box and do one of the following:  
Select Camera to take a picture and add it to this contact  
entry when you save the picture.  
Section 2B: Phone Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
89  
                 
Select Photos and select an existing picture that you want to assign to this  
contact.  
5. Select Done.  
Setting Your Dialing Preferences  
Dialing preferences let you add a prefix to your phone numbers. For example, you can  
automatically dial a 1 before all 10-digit phone numbers you enter from Contacts. You can  
also add a different prefix based on the length of the phone number.  
1. Press Phone  
.
2. Press Menu  
.
3. Select Options, and then select Dial Preferences.  
4. Set any one or more of the following options:  
Dialing from North America formats phone numbers  
using North American conventions (XXX-XXX-XXXX).  
Always dial 1 in front of the area code adds a 1 in front of  
10-digit phone numbers you dial from Contacts (see “Dialing by Contact Name”  
on page 58). A 1 is not automatically entered if you dial using the keyboard or  
the Dial Pad. This option is available only when Dialing from North America  
is enabled.  
International Prefix adds the specified prefix in front of international phone  
numbers; in the U.S. and Canada, this prefix is 011. When you dial, the plus  
symbol (+) preceding the phone number is replaced by this prefix.  
To 7 digit numbers adds a prefix to 7-digit numbers. For example, enter your own  
area code to automatically add your area code when you dial local numbers.  
To 6/5/4 digit numbers adds a prefix to numbers with the specified number of  
digits. For example, if all the phone numbers in your office begin with 555,  
followed by a 4-digit extension, you can select 4 and enter 555 as the prefix.  
When you want to call a colleague, simply enter the colleague’s 4-digit extension.  
90  
Section 2B: Phone Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Your device automatically dials 555 plus the 4-digit extension. You can also create  
contact entries with just the extension number and then dial the number from  
your Contacts list.  
5. Select OK.  
Setting Phone Preferences  
1. Press Phone  
.
2. Press Menu  
.
3. Select Options, and then select Phone Preferences.  
4. Select any one or more of the following preferences:  
Call forwarding lets you forward calls to another number.  
Location ON allows the Sprint National Network to  
determine your longitude and latitude position at any  
time in order to provide location-specific services.  
911 Only restricts your location information to emergency  
services only.  
Your device is equipped with a location feature for use in connection  
with location-based services. Currently the location information is used  
to help identify your longitude and latitude position during an  
emergency call in areas where E-911 service is available. For your safety,  
your location information is always provided during a 911 emergency  
call regardless of whether you select this setting.  
Note:  
Short DTMF Tones lets you choose to send DTMF tones (a certain type of  
touch-tone dialing tone) stored as Extra Digits as rapid tones (see “Defining  
Favorite Buttons” on page 75 for information on defining extra digits).  
Some older answering machines may not recognize short tones.  
Note:  
Section 2B: Phone Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
91  
                           
Clear Voicemail Icon lets you manually reset the Voicemail icon if it still appears in  
the Phone application title bar after you have listened to all your voicemail.  
TTY/TDD enables you to use your device’s phone if you are hearing impaired.  
Select Default Mode to send and receive text. Select VCO Mode (Voice Carry Over)  
to send voice and receive text. Select HCO Mode (Hearing Carry Over) to send text  
and receive voice. See the following section, “TTY Use With Sprint Service,” for  
more information.  
Hearing Aid Compatibility sends the audio from your phone calls to the telecoil  
rather than to the microphone of your hearing aid. See “Turning on the HAC  
Setting” on page 350 for more information on this setting.  
Ask to add unknown phone numbers after calls displays a prompt asking whether  
you would like to add the unknown phone number to your Contacts list when you  
complete a call.  
Do not turn on the Hearing Aid Compatibility setting unless you use a  
hearing aid with a telecoil. Using this setting without a hearing aid or  
with a hearing aid without a telecoil may be harmful to your hearing.  
Caution:  
5. Select OK.  
92  
Section 2B: Phone Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
TTY Use With Sprint Service  
A TTY (also known as a TDD or Text Telephone) is a telecommunications device that allows  
people who are deaf or hard of hearing, or who have speech or language disabilities, to  
communicate by telephone.  
Your device is compatible with select TTY devices. You can connect a TTY/TDD machine,  
headset, or hands-free kit to your device through the headset jack while this mode is  
enabled. Please check with the manufacturer of your TTY device for connectivity  
information and to ensure that the TTY device supports digital wireless transmission.  
When establishing your Sprint service, please call Sprint Customer Service via the state  
Telecommunications Relay Service (TRS) by first pressing 711 and then pressing Talk  
.
Then provide the state TRS with this number: 866-727-4889.  
911 Emergency Calling  
WARNING:  
Sprint recommends that TTY users make emergency calls by other  
means, including Telecommunications Relay Services (TRS), analog  
cellular, and land-line communications. Wireless TTY calls to 911 may be  
corrupted when received by public safety answering points (PSAPs),  
rendering some communications unintelligible. The problem  
encountered appears related to TTY equipment or software used by  
PSAPs. This matter has been brought to the attention of the FCC, and the  
wireless industry and PSAP community are currently working to resolve  
it.  
Section 2B: Phone Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
93  
                   
Controlling Your Roaming Experience  
Your device is digital dual-band, which means you can make and receive calls while on the  
Sprint National Network and you can also roam on other digital networks where Sprint has  
implemented agreements with other carriers.  
When you roam outside the Sprint National Network, the Roaming icon appears at the  
top of the screen. Additional charges may apply if you use your Centro device’s wireless  
service while roaming.  
To learn more about roaming, visit www.sprint.com.  
Feature Availability  
You can make and receive calls while roaming.  
You can access voicemail while roaming.  
Other features that are standard on the Sprint National Network, such as call waiting,  
Sprint Voice Command, and Sprint Power Vision, may be available depending upon your  
roaming network.  
Setting Roaming Preferences  
Use Roaming Preferences to set specific options for using your phone while roaming on  
another network. For example, you can set options to be notified that you are roaming  
before placing a call or making a data connection, so that you are aware that you might  
incur extra charges.  
1. Press Phone  
.
2. Press Menu  
.
3. Select Options, and then select Roaming Preferences.  
94  
Section 2B: Phone Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
4. Select the Network Selection pick list and select the networks with which you want to  
allow your phone to make a connection:  
Allow roaming enables your Centro device to determine the best network—either  
Sprint or roaming—with which to connect.  
Home networks only allows your phone to connect only to the Nationwide  
Sprint PCS Network.  
Roaming networks only allows your phone to connect to  
roaming networks only.  
5. Select the Before outgoing calls pick list to set whether  
roaming warnings appear when you attempt to dial an  
outgoing call:  
Automatic enables your Centro device to determine  
whether it is best to warn you when you make an  
outgoing call while roaming.  
Always causes an alert to appear each time you make an outgoing call while  
roaming.  
Never suppresses alerts when you make an outgoing call while roaming.  
6. Select the Before data connections pick list to set whether roaming warnings appear  
when you attempt to make a data connection, for example, to browse the Web:  
Automatic enables your Centro device to determine whether it is best to warn you  
when you make a data connection while roaming.  
Always causes an alert to appear each time you make a data connection while  
roaming.  
Never suppresses alerts when you make a data connection while roaming.  
7. Select OK.  
Section 2B: Phone Features  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Checking Signal Strength and Phone Status  
You can monitor the status of your device’s signal strength and several other items, using  
icons in the title bar of the Phone application.  
Sprint  
Your phone is on and you’re inside the Sprint National Network. If  
you are outside a coverage area, No Service or Roaming appears  
instead. No Service means that there is no coverage at all, and  
Roaming means that another wireless service provider’s network  
is available. When you turn off your phone, Phone Off appears.  
Your phone is on and is connected to the high-speed Sprint Mobile  
Broadband data network. When the triangles are blue, data is  
being transferred (for example, when you are opening a Web  
page); when the triangles are gray, you are connected to the  
network but data is not currently being transferred (for example,  
when you are viewing a Web page that is completely open). In  
either state, you can receive incoming calls.  
or  
Your phone is on and is connected to the Sprint (1xRTT) data  
network. When the arrows are green, data is being transferred (for  
example, when you are opening a Web page) and you cannot  
receive calls. When the arrows are gray, you are connected to the  
network but data is not currently being transferred (for example,  
when you are viewing a Web page that is completely open), and  
you can receive calls.  
Your phone is on and you are within range of a Sprint data  
network, but you do not have an active data connection. You can  
receive incoming calls.  
The Location ON option has been selected. The icon appears with a  
red slash when the 911 only option has been selected. See  
96  
Section 2B: Phone Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                 
Call forwarding is active.  
TTY/TDD mode is active. Use this mode to communicate by  
telephone if you are deaf or hard of hearing or if you have speech  
or language disabilities.  
You have new voicemail messages. You can select this icon to  
retrieve your messages.  
You have a new alert, such as a Calendar alarm or a new text  
message. To view the alert, press and hold Center  
or select the  
more information.  
Roaming is active.  
Bluetooth feature is off. The icon appears in blue when Bluetooth  
wireless technology is on and appears in reverse blue when your  
device is communicating with other devices using Bluetooth  
wireless technology. To quickly access the Bluetooth Preferences  
screen, tap the Bluetooth icon.  
Your device is connected to a headset that is enabled with  
Bluetooth wireless technology. This icon replaces the Bluetooth  
icon; it appears in light blue when you are not on a call and in dark  
blue when you are on a call.  
Replaces the Bluetooth icon when a dial-up networking  
connection using Bluetooth wireless technology is active.  
Your battery is partially drained. When the battery drains to 20%  
of its capacity, the icon changes from blue to red. At 10% of its  
capacity, you begin to receive warning messages, and at 5% of its  
capacity, the device beeps (if the Ringer switch is set to Sound On  
) and the icon changes from red to clear.  
Section 2B: Phone Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
97  
                             
Your battery is charging. The lightning bolt turns from red to green  
when the battery is fully charged and your device remains  
connected to the AC charger.  
Your battery is fully charged, and your device is not connected to  
the charger.  
You have new text or Picture Mail messages. The number next to  
the icon indicates the number of unread messages in your Inbox.  
Select this icon to view your messages.  
Displays the current (or next) event from the Calendar application.  
If you have an event conflict during the current time period, a red  
bar appears next to the event description. To jump to the current  
event in the Calendar application, select the Calendar status line  
To display the remaining battery power, tap the battery icon at the top of  
the screen.  
Tip:  
Viewing and Using the Alert Screen  
The Alert screen on your device shows information about incoming items such as new  
email messages and Calendar events. The Alert screen also notifies you if you miss a phone  
call.  
To view the Alert screen, select the blinking bell  
when it appears in the upper-left  
when the blinking bell appears.  
corner of any screen, or press and hold Center  
98  
Section 2B: Phone Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                         
You can do any of the following:  
Check the box to clear an alert from the list.  
Select the alert to open the corresponding application and view  
the alert item (message, event, missed call, and so on).  
Select Done to close the Alert screen and return to whatever you  
were doing on your device before you opened the Alert screen.  
The bell continues to blink in the upper-left corner of the screen.  
Select Snooze to temporarily close the Alert screen and return to  
whatever you were doing on your device before you opened the  
Alert screen. The screen reappears every five minutes until you select one of the other  
options.  
Select Clear All to delete all alerts on the Alert screen.  
Section 2B: Phone Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
99  
       
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 3  
Using Sprint Power Visionand  
Other Wireless Connections  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 3A  
Sprint Power Vision  
In This Section  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
103  
   
Getting Started With Sprint Power Vision  
Sprint Power Vision provides wireless access to the Internet anywhere on the Sprint  
National Network. To sign up for Sprint Power Vision services or to access complete  
instructions, visit www.sprint.com. For information on charges associated with features  
that use a Sprint Power Vision connection, refer to your Sprint Service Plan.  
Enabling Sprint Power Vision  
1. Make sure your device’s phone is turned on, as described in “Turning Your Device’s  
2. Press Option , and then press Phone  
.
3. When the Connect to the Internet dialog box appears, select Yes to open your device’s  
Web browser and make a Sprint Power Vision connection.  
If you have not already done so, select Now when the Preparing Vision Services  
dialog box appears. This initiates a one-time process to configure your Sprint  
Power Vision services. At the end of this two-minute process, your device connects  
to the Sprint Power Vision home page.  
If you want to cancel the connection, select No.  
To bypass the Connect to the Internet dialog box in the future, check the  
Tip:  
Don’t ask me again box.  
4. Use the 5-way  
to scroll around and select from a variety of online services.  
to exit the browser and end your session.  
5. Press Applications  
104  
Section 3A: Sprint Power Vision  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Sprint Power Vision Features  
With Sprint Power Vision services, you have access to additional features, better  
performance, faster Web connections, and a wider variety of online services. Features such  
as Web access and sending/receiving digital images are available on your  
Palm Centro™ smart device through the Sprint National Network.  
Sprint Picture MailSM enables you to instantly shoot, share, and print sharp,  
high-resolution digital pictures, and take and send short video clips with your device.  
On Demand enables you to set and then receive customized, up-to-date information on  
sports, weather, news, money, and more, on demand—the way you want it.  
Sprint Mobile EmailSM provides access to a variety of email services, including Yahoo!,  
AOL, MSN, Gmail, and other POP and IMAP servers.  
SprintTVSM enables you to watch live Mobile Digital TV (MDTV) on the go with  
full-motion video and vivid sound.  
Messaging enables you to send and receive email, text (SMS), and multimedia  
messages, or to chat.  
Web gives you the experience of full-color graphic versions of popular Web sites.  
Phone as Modem lets you use your smart device and your Sprint Power Vision  
connection as a wireless modem for your laptop computer.  
Sprint Instant Messaging (IM) enables you to exchange short, simple text messages  
with another computer or smart device.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
105  
                               
Accessing Sprint Power Vision  
Once your device is activated, you are signed in and ready to connect to Sprint Power Vision  
services at any time.  
Sprint Power Vision User Name  
Your Sprint Power Vision User Name is automatically assigned to you. Your user name is  
used with Sprint Mail and Messaging services. Your Sprint Power Vision User Name is  
simply an additional address that identifies your Sprint Account. When your device is  
enabled with Sprint Power Vision services, your user name automatically appears on the  
Phone Info screen.  
To find your user name:  
1. Press Phone  
.
2. Press Menu  
.
3. Select Options, and then select Phone Info.  
Sprint Power Vision Symbols on Your Screen  
When you are connected to Sprint Power Vision services, a data connection icon appears at  
the top of the Main view in the Phone application. See “Checking Signal Strength and  
Phone Status” on page 96 for a description of the various data connection icons.  
Sprint Power Vision Billing Information  
See your service plan for details on Sprint Power Vision billing.  
106  
Section 3A: Sprint Power Vision  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Personalizing Your Service With On Demand  
With Sprint Power Vision’s exclusive On Demand feature, you can personalize your device’s  
data services to suit your needs. The On Demand feature makes it easier than ever to  
retrieve the most popular Web information and categories instantly. On Demand uses the  
ZIP code you provide to customize the content you receive, so you can get the information  
you want, when you want it.  
On Demand acts like a computer browser’s customized home page, displaying a variety of  
top categories such as News, Sports, Weather, Money, Movies, and more. This information  
is updated throughout the day, so you’ll always be up-to-date. In addition to presenting a  
number of fixed categories, On Demand also offers optional categories (for an additional  
monthly charge) that allow faster access to even more information.  
Initializing Your On Demand Service  
1. Press Applications  
and select On Demand  
.
2. Enter your preferred ZIP code and select Next.  
3. Accept the Terms and Conditions. (The On Demand service  
customizes itself to your location, and the On Demand menu  
screen appears.)  
Accessing On Demand Information  
Finding the information you’re looking for with On Demand is as easy as navigating a Web  
browser on your computer. The following examples illustrate how to access News and  
Movies information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
107  
           
To access News information using On Demand:  
1. Press Applications  
and select On Demand  
. (The On  
Demand menu screen appears.)  
2. From the On Demand menu screen, highlight News (the  
button name changes to Late Breaking News & Photos), and  
then press Center  
.
3. Depending on which category you select, you see a menu  
with additional options (for this example, you can select from  
subcategories such as “Top Stories,” “US News,” “World  
News,” and “Politics”).  
4. Select a subcategory, and then select an article you would like to view. (The article  
appears.)  
5. Navigate the content as follows:  
Press Up  
or Down to scroll through the article.  
Press Right to access the options at the bottom of the screen.  
To access Movies information using On Demand:  
1. Press Applications  
and select On Demand  
. (The On Demand menu screen  
appears.)  
2. From the On Demand menu screen, highlight Showbiz (the button name changes to  
Hollywood News & Showtimes), and press Center  
.
3. Select Movie Showtimes & Reviews and press Center  
. (A list of current movie  
titles appears.)  
4. Select a movie title.  
108  
Section 3A: Sprint Power Vision  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
5. From the Movie Title display, select an option and follow the onscreen instructions.  
Options available may include:  
Shows for Date to select a date for the movie.  
<theater listing> to view the movie’s showtimes at a  
number of selected movie theaters in your area. Follow the  
onscreen instructions to purchase will-call tickets (may  
not be available for all theaters or for all showtimes).  
Details to view the movie’s details, which may include  
cast, running time, plot synopsis, MPAA rating, reviews,  
and so on.  
Additional fixed On Demand categories such as Money (which features a customizable  
stock ticker [delayed 20 minutes]), Weather, and Sports (which allows you to select your top  
teams), along with optional categories such as Maps and TV Guide, bring the information  
you want right to your screen—all without having to go through a traditional Web search.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
109  
             
Using Your Device’s Phone as a Modem  
Your device’s data capabilities enable you to use your device’s phone as a modem for your  
laptop computer anywhere on the Sprint Mobile Broadband network. You'll be able to send  
and receive email, browse the Internet, and access your company’s network anywhere on  
the Sprint National Network.  
To use this service, you are required to sign up on a Sprint Power Vision  
with Phone as Modem plan. Go to www.sprint.com or visit a Sprint Store  
for Phone as Modem plan details and more information.  
Note:  
Setting Up a Data Connection With Your Computer  
To use your phone as a modem, you first need to load the Sprint Connection Manager  
software on your computer, and then use the sync cable to connect your device to your  
computer.  
If your computer is enabled with Bluetooth® wireless technology, you  
can also use your device as a wireless modem. See “Using Your Device as  
Tip:  
To set up your phone-to-computer data connection:  
1. Install the Sprint Connection Manager software and drivers located on the Palm  
Software Installation CD.  
2. After you install the software, connect your device to your computer using the sync  
cable. (When your computer detects the connection, the  
taskbar in the lower-right corner of your computer screen.)  
icon appears in the  
3. Make sure your device’s phone is turned on (see “Turning Your Device’s Phone On and  
Off” on page 55) and that one of the Vision icons (  
screen.  
or ) appears at the top of the  
110  
Section 3A: Sprint Power Vision  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
If neither icon appears, you cannot use your device as a modem with  
Sprint Connection Manager.  
Note:  
4. On your computer, open the Sprint Connection Manager software, select your device  
name, and then click Connect.  
5. Once the connection is established, launch an Internet session, check your email, or  
do anything else you would do using a traditional Internet connection.  
6. When you’re ready to terminate the Internet connection, double-click the Sprint  
Connection Manager icon in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your computer  
screen, and then click Disconnect to end the session.  
While your data connection is active, you can receive incoming calls and  
place outgoing calls; however, doing either of these suspends the data  
connection until you hang up the call.  
Note:  
Sprint Power Vision data services are available on the Sprint National  
Network. Sprint Power Vision services work anywhere on the network,  
but broadband-like download speeds are available only in areas with  
high-speed data covered by the Sprint Mobile Broadband network.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
111  
           
112  
Section 3A: Sprint Power Vision  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 3B  
Using Email  
In This Section  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
113  
   
What Email Applications Can I Use on My Smart Device?  
If you’ve activated Sprint Power Vision, you’re ready to set up an email application on your  
Palm Centro™ smart device. You can use an email application with your Sprint Mobile Email  
account, as well as with other email accounts, such as AOL or Earthlink. You can also use an  
email application with a corporate account.  
Your device includes two email application options:  
Sprint Mobile EmailSM.  
The VersaMail® application.  
You can also access Web-based email, such as Hotmail, Gmail, or Yahoo! from your device’s  
Web browser.  
An email application is not an email provider. It works with an account  
from a provider—your Sprint account, for example—or a corporate  
account to transfer messages to your device.  
Note:  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Using Sprint Mobile Email  
Install the optional Sprint Mobile Email application for access to a variety of email services,  
including the following:  
Yahoo!.  
AOL.  
MSN.  
Gmail.  
Other POP and IMAP servers.  
This section includes the following information:  
Sprint Mobile Email sends and receives messages using existing email  
accounts. Visit your email provider’s Web site for more information or to  
set up an account, or ask your network administrator for assistance.  
Important:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
115  
               
Getting Started With Sprint Mobile Email  
1. Press Applications  
, and then select Get Email  
.
2. Follow the onscreen instructions to download and install the Sprint Mobile Email  
application on your Centro device. (For more information and complete setup  
instructions, visit www.sprint.com.)  
3. When the installation is complete, press Applications  
Email  
and select Sprint Mobile  
.
4. Enter the phone number for your Centro device and select  
Next.  
5. Select an email provider from the list and select Next. (If your  
6. Select Accept to agree to the Terms of Use and continue with  
account setup. (Select Decline to refuse the terms and end the  
configuration.)  
7. Enter the User Name and Password for the email account.  
8. Select Register to initialize the service on your Centro device.  
(When a connection is established, Sprint Mobile Email retrieves your messages from  
the server and displays the messages in the account Inbox.)  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring Additional Email Accounts on Sprint Mobile Email  
1. Press Applications  
, and then select Sprint Mobile Email  
.
2. Select Account Manager.  
3. Select Add Account.  
4. Select an email provider from the list. (If your email provider is  
5. Select Accept to agree to the Terms of Use and continue with  
account setup. (Select Decline to terminate the account  
configuration.)  
6. Enter the User Name and Password for the email account.  
7. Select Register to initialize the service on your Centro device. (When a connection is  
established, Sprint Mobile Email retrieves your messages and displays them in your  
Inbox.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
117  
   
Configuring Other Email Accounts on Sprint Mobile Email  
1. If your email provider does not appear in the list of providers,  
select More choices from the Get email from: screen and  
select Next.  
2. Select the type of email account you want to configure: PCS  
Mail, Other POP, or Other IMAP and select Next.  
Select PCS Mail to configure your Sprint email account on  
your Centro device.  
(For more information and to set up an account, visit  
Select Other POP to configure a POP3 email account. (Ask  
your account administrator or email provider for the  
required information described in the following steps.)  
Select Other IMAP to configure an IMAP email account. (Ask your account  
administrator or email provider for the required information described in the  
following steps.)  
3. Enter your user name and password and select Next:  
PCS Mail User Name and Password: (Sprint Mail accounts only.) Enter the user  
name and password for your Sprint email account.  
Email Address: Enter the complete email address of your account.  
Password: Enter the password for your email account.  
User Name: (POP and IMAP accounts only.) Enter the user name required for the  
incoming mail server.  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Enter the information required by the incoming mail server and select Next:  
Incoming Mail Server: Enter the complete name of the incoming mail server for  
your email provider (for example, pop.mail.company.com).  
Port: Specifies the port number for the incoming mail server. (The default port is  
110 for POP or 143 for IMAP.)  
Use SSL: Check the box if the incoming mail server uses Secure Socket Layers (SSL).  
5. Enter the information required by the outgoing mail server and select Next:  
Outgoing Mail Server: Enter the complete name of the outgoing mail server for  
your email provider. (For example, smtp.mail.company.com.)  
Port: Specifies the port number for the outgoing mail server.  
Use SSL: Check the box if the outgoing mail server uses Secure Socket Layers (SSL).  
Require Authentication: Check the box if your email provider requires  
authentication for outgoing email.  
6. Review the Account Summary, and then select Next. (Select Back to return to a  
previous screen and change the configuration.)  
7. Select Register to initialize the service on your Centro device. (When a connection is  
established, Sprint Mobile Email retrieves your messages and displays them in the  
Inbox.)  
Working With Your Sprint Mobile Email Accounts  
Once your email accounts are configured, you can send, receive, and organize email  
messages from the inbox of each email account.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
119  
 
1. Press Applications  
, and then select Sprint Mobile Email  
.
2. Select an email account to open the Inbox for that account.  
3. Do one of the following:  
To read the message, select the message entry.  
To check for new messages, press Menu  
, and then  
select Receive from the Message menu.  
To delete a message, check the box next to one or more  
messages and select the Delete icon.  
To create a new email message, select the Compose  
Mobile Email” on page 122 for more information.)  
To sort the messages, select the View pick list, and then select an option from the  
list.  
To return to the main screen, select the Home icon at the top of the screen.  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Receiving and Viewing Email Messages Using Sprint Mobile Email  
1. Open Sprint Mobile Email and select an email account.  
2. To download new messages, press Menu  
, and then select  
Receive from the Message menu.  
3. To read a message, select it.  
4. Do one of the following:  
Drag the slider of the onscreen scroll bar to read the entire  
message.  
Select the Delete icon to permanently delete the  
message.  
Select the Reply icon to reply to the sender.  
Select the Reply All icon to reply to all the recipients of  
the message.  
Select the Forward icon to forward the message to a new recipient.  
Tap the onscreen arrows, or at the bottom of the message to view the  
previous or next message in the Inbox.  
Select the Back icon to return to the Inbox.  
Select Show Details to view additional information in the header of the message.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
121  
 
Creating and Sending Messages Using Sprint Mobile Email  
1. Open Sprint Mobile Email and select an email account to open the Inbox for that  
account.  
2. Select the Compose icon.  
3. Begin entering the addressee’s email address, first name, or  
last name. (If the information matches one or more entries in  
Contacts, Sprint Mobile Email displays the matching contacts.  
To accept a suggestion, highlight the correct contact and press  
Center  
. To send to a different address, keep entering the  
email address or name.)  
4. (Optional) Enter additional addresses in the Cc and Bcc fields.  
(For multiple recipients in any field, enter a semicolon and then a space before  
entering the next recipient name or address.)  
5. Enter the subject and message text. (To move between fields, press Up  
or  
Down .)  
You can mark outgoing messages as high priority. Press Menu, select  
Tip:  
Options, and then select Priority.  
6. Select one of the following buttons:  
Send connects and sends the messages immediately. (If you select Send and the  
message cannot be sent for any reason, the message is stored in your Outbox.)  
Save Draft saves the message to the Drafts folder for the email account so that  
you can continue working on it at another time.  
Cancel deletes the message without saving or sending it.  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Attaching Files Using Sprint Mobile Email  
To send files such as photos, videos, or Microsoft Office documents using Sprint Mobile  
Email, complete the following steps:  
1. Create the message to which you want to attach the file.  
2. Select the paper clip  
icon at the top of the message.  
3. Use the pick-lists at the top of the File Finder screen to select  
the location and file type:  
Select Handheld in the left pick list to locate a file stored  
on your Centro device. (If a microSD expansion card is  
installed, you can also select SD Card.)  
By default, all file types are listed. (To display only the files  
for a specific file type, select the type from the right pick  
list.)  
4. Check the box next to one or more filenames, and then do one of the following:  
Select View to view one or more files on your Centro device.  
Select Attach to attach one or more files to the email message.  
Select Cancel to return to the message without attaching a file.  
5. Select Send to send the message and any attachments.  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The VersaMail® Application  
The VersaMail application enables you to access up to eight email accounts—personal or  
corporate. You can view attachments through the Documents application on your device  
and interface with your corporate Global Address List (GAL). VersaMail also supports  
Microsoft Direct Push synchronization of email and personal information; as messages are  
received on the server, they are automatically downloaded to your device.  
Before you can use VersaMail, you need to enter your email account settings. If you have  
multiple email accounts, you must enter settings for each account.  
This guide includes basic information on sending and receiving email messages. For  
additional information on using and customizing Versamail, see the User Guide for the  
VersaMail Application located on your Palm Software Installation CD, or visit  
go.palm.com/centro-sprint/ for more information.  
How Do I Get Started?  
1. If either of the following is true, see the User Guide for the VersaMail Application  
located on your CD for setup steps:  
You used the VersaMail application on your previous device or smartphone, and  
you want to transfer your settings and messages to your smart device.  
You plan to use the VersaMail application to access an email account on a  
Microsoft Exchange server, a Lotus Notes server, or a Microsoft MAPI server.  
2. If your email provider is included in the following list, skip to “Setting Up VersaMail to  
Your email provider is the service you use to send and receive email. Your  
email provider’s name appears between the @ symbol and the dot  
symbol in your email address.  
Tip:  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                             
Adelphia  
Airmail.net  
AOL  
CompuServe  
Concentric  
Covad  
NetZero  
Qwest (select areas)  
RCN  
Cox (East, Central, &  
West)  
Apple.Mac  
SBC (select areas)  
Speakeasy  
AT&T (mMode &  
Worldnet)  
EarthLink  
Gmail (you must  
Bell South  
enable forwarding  
from the Gmail site)  
USA.net  
Cablevision  
Charter  
Juno  
Verizon DSL  
Yahoo! (fee-based  
accounts only)  
Mail.com  
Media com  
Comcast  
3. If your email provider’s name is not listed, you need to obtain the following  
information from your system administrator or ISP, and then skip to “Setting Up  
Mail protocol: POP, IMAP, or Outlook Mail (EAS).  
Incoming and outgoing mail server names, such as mail.myisp.com.  
Incoming and outgoing mail server port numbers, such as 110 (incoming POP),  
143 (incoming IMAP), or 25 (outgoing POP or IMAP).  
(If necessary) Security settings: APOP, ESMTP, SSL.  
The correct protocol, server, and security settings are required for  
VersaMail to be able to send and receive email for your account. Your  
email provider can easily provide these settings.  
Note:  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up VersaMail to Work With Common Providers  
1. Press Applications  
and select Email  
to open the VersaMail application.  
The first time you set up the VersaMail application, you are asked if you  
want to continue with account setup after you open the application.  
Select Continue and go to step 3.  
Tip:  
2. Press Menu  
, select Accounts, select Account Setup, and  
then select New.  
3. In the Email Address field, enter your email address.  
4. In the Password field, enter your email account password.  
5. If the VersaMail application can obtain your email account  
settings based on your username and password, the Next  
button changes to Done. Select Done.  
If the Next button does not change to Done, you need to obtain certain  
Note:  
information about your account (see “How Do I Get Started?” on  
6. (Optional) Select Yes to download messages for this account  
now.  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Setting Up VersaMail to Work With Other Providers  
1. Press Applications  
and select Email  
to open the VersaMail application.  
The first time you set up the VersaMail application, you are asked if you  
want to continue with account setup after you open the application.  
Select Continue and go to step 3.  
Tip:  
2. Press Menu  
, select Accounts, select Account Setup, and  
then select New.  
3. In the Email Address field, enter your email address.  
4. In the Password field, enter your email account password.  
5. Select Next.  
6. Select the Mail Type pick list, and then select POP, IMAP, or  
Outlook Mail (EAS) (based on the information you got from  
your system administrator or ISP).  
7. Enter the username you use to access your email.  
Your username can be either the part of your email address appearing  
Tip:  
before the @ symbol or your entire email address. Check with your email  
provider if you are not sure what username to enter.  
8. Enter the names of your incoming and outgoing mail servers.  
9. Select Done to finish setup and go to the inbox of the account  
you set up, where you can begin getting and sending email. (If  
your system administrator or ISP provided the port number or  
security settings, select Advanced and enter those settings.)  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Receiving and Viewing Email Messages  
1. Make sure your phone is turned on (see “Turning Your Device’s  
2. Press Applications  
and select Email  
to open the  
VersaMail application.  
3. From any mailbox, select Get.  
4. From the Inbox, select the message you want to view.  
5. If a large incoming message is truncated, select More  
.
6. Select Done.  
Managing Your Email Messages  
The status icons that appear next to the messages in your Inbox indicate the following:  
Only the subject header information is downloaded.  
Part or all of the message text is downloaded.  
The message includes an attachment.  
This message is high priority.  
You can rearrange the VersaMail list to make it easier to find and view messages.  
In the Inbox, select Sort, and then select one of the following: By Subject, By Sender, By  
Size, or By Date.  
To quickly switch between folders (for example, the Inbox folder and the Sent folder),  
select the folder pick list at the top of the screen and select the desired folder.  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
Replying to Email Messages  
1. From the Inbox or another folder, open the message to which  
you want to respond.  
2. From Message view, select Reply. (Select whether to reply to  
just the sender or to both the sender and all other addressees  
on the message.)  
3. Enter your reply, and then select Send.  
When you respond to messages, you can select whether to include the  
Tip:  
Creating and Sending Email Messages  
1. Press Applications  
and select Email  
to open the VersaMail application.  
2. From the Inbox, select New.  
3. Begin entering the addressee’s email address, first name, or  
last name. (If the information matches one or more entries in  
Contacts, VersaMail displays the matching contacts. To accept  
a suggestion, select the correct contact. To send to a different  
address, keep entering the email address or name.)  
To send a copy or blind copy, select the square icon to the right of the red  
Tip:  
paper clip to display the Cc and Bcc fields. Enter the address(es) in those  
fields. For multiple recipients in any field, enter a semicolon and then a  
space before entering the next recipient name or address.  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
4. Enter the subject and message text. (To move between fields, press Up  
or  
Down .)  
You can mark outgoing messages as high priority. Open the Options  
Tip:  
menu and select Set Priority To High.  
5. Select one of the following buttons:  
Send connects and sends all messages immediately. (If you select Send and the  
message cannot be sent for any reason, the message is stored in your Outbox.  
VersaMail makes up to three attempts to automatically send the message; if  
automatic send is not successful, an alert message appears from which you can  
manually reattempt to send the message again.)  
Drafts saves the message so that you can continue working on it at another time.  
If you are composing a message and need to switch to another  
application (such as the Phone application), the message text you  
entered will be displayed when you return to the VersaMail application.  
Tip:  
Attaching Pictures and Videos  
1. Create the message to which you want to attach the picture or  
video.  
2. On the New Message screen, select the paper clip icon in  
the upper-right corner of the screen.  
3. Select Photo/Video from the Type pick list.  
4. On the Select Media screen, select the Album pick list to go to  
the album containing the picture or video you want, and then  
check the box to the left of the picture or video.  
5. Select Done.  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                   
Repeat steps 3 and 4 to attach more than one picture or video to a  
message. To remove an attachment, select the file in the Attachments  
box, and then select Delete.  
Tip:  
Attaching Voice Memos  
1. Create the message to which you want to attach the voice memo.  
2. On the New Message screen, select the paper clip icon in the upper-right corner of  
the screen.  
3. Select Voice Memo or Voice Memo (wav) from the Type pick list.  
4. Select the voice memo you want, and then select OK. If you selected Voice Memo  
(wav), select the voice memo you want in the Type box, and then select Add.  
5. Select Done.  
Attaching Word, Excel®, and PowerPoint® Files  
1. Create the message to which you want to attach the item.  
2. On the New Message screen, select the paper clip icon in the upper-right corner of  
the screen.  
3. Select Documents from the Type pick list.  
4. Select the file you want on the Documents screen.  
5. Select Done.  
Repeat steps 3 and 4 to attach more than one file to a message. To  
remove an attachment, select the file in the Attachments box and then  
select Delete.  
Tip:  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Attaching Other Types of Files  
1. Create the message to which you want to attach the item.  
2. On the New Message screen, select the paper clip icon in the upper-right corner of  
the screen.  
3. Select the type of file to attach—for example, Address, Appointment, or  
Memo/Text—from the Type pick list. To attach a ringtone, select Sounds.  
4. Select the file you want from the list in the Type box, and then select Add. If you  
selected Sounds, select the ringtone from the Manage Sound list, and then select  
Insert.  
5. Select Done.  
Repeat steps 3 and 4 to attach more than one file to a message. To  
remove an attachment, select the file in the Attachments box, and then  
select Delete.  
Tip:  
Viewing Attachments  
You can open a number of attachment types (for example, Microsoft Word, Excel®, and  
PowerPoint® files, PDF files, sound files, and photos) with the built-in software on your  
device.  
1. From any folder, open the message with the attachment you want to view. (Messages  
with downloaded attachments are indicated by a paper clip icon to the left of the  
message icon.)  
If an attachment is not downloaded because it is larger than your  
maximum message size, the paper clip icon does not appear, and the  
attachment is not displayed at the bottom of the message screen. Select  
More to download and display any attachments.  
Note:  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                               
2. Select the attachment name to view it in the default viewer on your device.  
–or–  
Select the folder icon to the left of the attachment name to open a menu of tasks you  
can do with the attachment, including View, Install, or Unzip, depending on the  
attachment file type; Save to save the attachment to your device or to an expansion  
card; or Select Viewer to select the application you want to use to view the  
attachment.  
3. When you have finished with the attachment, select Done to return to the  
Attachments dialog box. (If there is no Done button, press Applications  
and  
select Email  
to return to the Inbox of the account you were using in the VersaMail  
application.)  
Deleting a Single Email Message  
When you delete a message, it moves to the Trash folder.  
1. To delete a message from the Inbox or another message screen, highlight the  
message, and then press Backspace . (To delete a message you are reading or  
composing while the message is open, just press Backspace .)  
2. Select OK to confirm the deletion.  
To delete a single message, you can also highlight it, press Right on the  
Tip:  
5-way, and then select Delete.  
When you delete a message in Message view, by default you return to  
the Inbox. You can change the setting so that you go to the next  
message instead. From the Options menu, select Preferences, select  
Deletion, and then select Go to Next Message from the After deleting a  
message pick list.  
Tip:  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Deleting Multiple Email Messages  
1. On the Inbox or another folder screen, select the bullet next to the icon of each  
message that you want to delete. To select adjacent messages, drag the stylus so that  
it touches the bullet to the left of each message. Lift the stylus and drag it again to  
select more adjacent messages.  
2. Press Menu  
.
3. Select Delete on the Message menu.  
4. If a confirmation message appears, select OK to confirm the deletion.  
Deleting Email Messages by Date  
You can quickly delete a group of messages by selecting a range of dates.  
1. From the Inbox or any folder, press Menu  
2. Select Delete Old on the Message menu.  
3. Select the folder and a date range for the messages you want to delete.  
4. Select Delete.  
5. Select Also delete message(s) on server if you want to delete the messages from the  
server now. (If you delete a message on the server, you cannot retrieve it and view it  
again later.)  
6. Select OK. (If a confirmation dialog box appears, select OK to confirm deletion.)  
To empty (or purge) the Trash folder, open the Message menu and select  
Empty Trash. See the User Guide for the VersaMail Application located on  
your Palm Software Installation CD, or visit go.palm.com/centro-sprint/  
for more information.  
Tip:  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Switching Between Email Accounts  
You can switch between different email accounts—for example, between your work and  
your personal account.  
1. From any mailbox screen, press Menu  
.
2. Select Accounts, and then select an account.  
Setting Email Preferences  
You can customize the VersaMail settings for each individual email account on your  
Centro device. The preferences you set apply only to the email account you are currently  
viewing. If you have multiple accounts, configure each account separately.  
You can customize the display of your mailbox screens, how and when to get new  
messages, alert sounds, reply options, and more. For complete instructions on customizing  
your email settings, see the User Guide for the VersaMail Application located on your Palm  
Software Installation CD, or visit go.palm.com/centro-sprint/ for more information.  
Downloading New Email Messages Automatically  
You can set up VersaMail to automatically download new email  
messages to your device.  
1. From any mailbox screen, press Menu  
.
2. Select Options, and then select Preferences.  
3. Select Auto Sync.  
Tip:  
For more information on working with Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync®  
accounts, see the User Guide for the VersaMail Application located on  
your Palm Software Installation CD, or visit go.palm.com/centro-sprint/.  
4. Check the Mail box next to the Auto-sync option.  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
5. Select the Every pick list and select the time interval, from 5 minutes to 12 hours. (If  
you set a more frequent interval, you may need to recharge your device’s battery more  
often.)  
6. Select the Start Time and End Time boxes, and then select the hour, the minute, and  
AM or PM to enter the time for the first and last Auto Sync to take place. Select OK.  
7. Select the days you want the schedule to be active. You can choose any number of  
days, but you can set up only one schedule for each email account.  
8. Select OK, and then select Get. (Doing this ensures that only new messages are  
retrieved during your next Auto Sync retrieval.)  
Playing Sounds When New Email Arrives  
When new email messages arrive, an alert appears on the Alert screen (see “Viewing and  
Using the Alert Screen” on page 98 for information). In addition, when you schedule Auto  
Sync for a given account, you can choose a sound—such as a bird, a phone, or an alarm—to  
let you know when new email arrives.  
1. From any mailbox screen, press Menu  
.
2. Select Options, and then select Preferences.  
3. Select Alerts.  
4. Check the Alert me of new mail box.  
5. Select the Alert Sound pick list, and then select a sound. The device plays a brief demo  
of the sound.  
6. Select the Vibrate pick list, and then select an option for when you want your device  
to vibrate.  
7. Select OK.  
Setting Options for Receiving Email Messages  
1. From any mailbox screen, press Menu  
.
2. Select Options, and then select Preferences.  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
3. Select Incoming.  
4. Set any of the following preferences:  
Get indicates whether to get message subjects only or  
entire messages.  
Ask Every Time (IMAP accounts only) indicates whether  
you want to see a dialog box for choosing subjects only or  
entire messages each time you retrieve email. If the box is  
unchecked, messages are retrieved according to the option  
you select in the Get pick list.  
Unread messages downloads only unread mail to your device (IMAP accounts  
only). If you don’t choose this option and you select Get, all your messages on your  
provider’s mail server are downloaded to your Inbox, including messages you  
have already read.  
Mail from last gets messages sent within the number of days you specify  
(default is 3).  
Download attachments allows files attached to email to be automatically  
downloaded to your device. Attachments that exceed the maximum message size  
cannot be downloaded.  
Maximum message size sets the maximum size limit, in kilobytes (KB), for how  
much of an incoming email message is downloaded. The maximum size of an  
incoming message is 5KB by default (that is, the first 5KB of all incoming email  
messages is downloaded), but you can enter any size up to 2,048KB  
(approximately 2 megabytes, or 2MB), including attachments.  
The maximum message size that you can retrieve is 60KB for the body  
text and approximately 5MB of total data for any attachments. To view a  
message whose total size is greater than the maximum message size  
you select but is less than 5MB, you need to select More on the message  
screen to fully download the message.  
Note:  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Message Format sets the format in which you retrieve messages. If you choose  
HTML, any messages sent in HTML format appear with basic HTML formatting  
intact. Other messages appear as plain text. If you choose Text, all messages  
appear as plain text, regardless of the format in which they were sent.  
VersaMail sends all messages as plain text only, with all HTML tags  
stripped, even if you are forwarding or replying to a message that was  
originally received as HTML.  
Note:  
5. Select OK.  
Attaching a Signature to a Email Message  
You can attach a personal signature, with information such as your company's address and  
its fax and telephone numbers, to the bottom of all messages you send.  
1. From any mailbox screen, press Menu  
.
2. Select Options, and then select Preferences.  
3. Select Signature.  
4. Check the Attach Signature box.  
5. Enter your signature information, and then select OK.  
Getting Messages From Your Corporate Microsoft Exchange Server  
Onto Your Device  
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync works with the Calendar, Contacts, and VersaMail  
applications on your device to directly access corporate groupware information on a  
Microsoft Exchange 2003 or 2007 server. Information in these applications is pushed using  
Microsoft Direct Push directly from the server to your device or wirelessly synchronizes  
directly with the server from your device without using a desktop computer.  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                         
A Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account interacts with your desktop software as follows:  
Microsoft Outlook: Information in Calendar, Contacts, and VersaMail on your device is  
pushed using Microsoft Direct Push or syncs with the server; it does not sync directly  
with Outlook on your desktop. However, if the server pushes information to or syncs  
with Outlook on your desktop, any information you enter in these applications on your  
device also appears in Outlook after the next server push or sync.  
Microsoft Direct Push is a feature provided by Microsoft Exchange  
ActiveSync that pushes email messages, Calendar events, meeting  
invitations, and updated contact information it receives onto your  
device.  
Note:  
Palm® Desktop software: Information in Calendar, Contacts, and VersaMail on your  
device does not sync with and does not appear in Palm Desktop software on your  
computer.  
Information in other applications on your device, such as Tasks and Memos, continues to  
sync with and appear in the desktop software on your computer (Outlook or Palm Desktop).  
For complete information on using a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account, see the User  
Guide for the VersaMail Application located on your Palm Software Installation CD, or visit  
go.palm.com/centro-sprint/ for more information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
139  
         
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 3C  
Messaging  
In This Section  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
141  
   
Creating and Sending Messages  
You can exchange brief text messages with other wireless phones that have text  
messaging capability. You can also send Sprint Picture Mail messages (including images,  
videos, voice memos, and text) to other users. Both text messages and Sprint Picture Mail  
messages can also be sent to email addresses. Before you use your Palm Centro™ smart  
device to send or receive messages, please verify pricing and availability with Sprint.  
Before you use Messaging, make sure your phone is turned on, as described in “Turning  
Creating and Sending a Text Message  
You can exchange text messages of up to 160 characters.  
If you send a text message to an email address, the email address is  
deducted from the 160-character count.  
Note:  
1. Press Messaging  
.
2. Select New.  
3. Select the To field to address the message:  
Press Center  
of recent addresses, select it from the list.  
. If the recipient’s name appears in the list  
If the recipient is in your Contacts list, enter the first initial  
and last name (no spaces), and then select the recipient’s  
phone number or email address, depending on where you want to send the  
message.  
If the recipient’s name isn’t in the list of recent addresses or your Contacts list,  
enter the phone number or email address.  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                             
If you address the message to a short code, the text and corresponding number is  
displayed when you jump down to the body of the message. Short codes (also  
known as short numbers) are brief, easy to remember telephone numbers and  
text codes used to send text and multimedia messages for voting, polling,  
contests, surveys, chat, games, and other applications. For more information on  
short text codes, visit www.usshortcodeswhois.com.  
If you see numbers when you expect to see letters (or the other way  
around), you need to turn Option Lock on by pressing Option twice or  
turn it off by pressing Option once.  
Tip:  
4. Press Down  
5. Enter your message or select QuickText  
emoticons, select  
to jump to the body of the message.  
to insert predefined phrases. To insert  
.
Some symbols can’t be used in text messages. The Messaging  
Tip:  
application automatically replaces invalid characters.  
6. (Optional) Press Menu  
, and then select High Priority or Normal Priority on the  
Compose menu to set an urgency level for the message.  
7. Select Send.  
If you are out of a coverage area or if your device is off, outgoing messages go into the  
Outbox folder. When you return to a coverage area, your pending messages are sent  
automatically and are transferred to the Sent folder.  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Creating and Sending a Sprint Picture Mail Message  
Sprint Picture Mail messages consist of pictures, videos, text, and sounds. You can include  
pictures and videos you captured with the built-in camera as well as any of the following  
items:  
Pictures  
Videos  
Text messages  
Voice memos  
The first time you share a picture or video, you are prompted to establish a Sprint Picture  
Mail account and password. Enter a four- to eight-digit alphanumeric password and press  
Center  
. Once you receive confirmation, you can continue to send or upload pictures and  
videos.  
For information about the terms of your Sprint Picture Mail service,  
Note:  
please visit http://www.sprint.com/.  
1. Press Messaging  
.
2. Select New.  
3. Select the To field to address the message:  
Press Center  
select it from the list.  
. If the recipient’s name appears in the list of recent addresses,  
If the recipient is in your Contacts list, enter the first initial and last name (no  
spaces), and then select the recipient’s phone number or email address,  
depending on where you want to send the message.  
If the recipient’s name is not in the list of recent addresses or your Contacts list,  
enter the mobile number or email address.  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
You may need to press Option to enter letters or numbers. The Option  
Lock setting defaults to the setting you used the last time you addressed  
a message.  
Tip:  
4. Select Add media.  
5. Select the Media icon and select one of the following:  
Attach from device lets you attach a picture or video from  
your device.  
Attach from Online lets you attach a picture or video from  
page 193 for information.  
Take new picture prompts you to take a new picture with  
the built-in camera and attach it to the message.  
Take new video prompts you to capture a new video with the built-in camcorder  
and attach it to the message.  
6. (Optional) Repeat step 5 for each item you want to attach.  
7. Enter your message or select QuickText to insert predefined phrases. To insert  
emoticons, select  
.
8. Select Send. If the Welcome screen appears, select Continue.  
Your device uploads the pictures or videos to the Sprint Picture Mail Web site  
(www.sprint.com/picturemail), creates a private Guest Book for the recipient on the Sprint  
Picture Mail Web site, and sends your message to the recipient. The recipient can then use a  
Web browser to access this private Guest Book to view the pictures or videos and to enter  
comments. You can view the comments later from the Sprint Picture Mail Web site.  
If you are outside a coverage area or if your phone is off, outgoing messages go into the  
Drafts folder. When you return to a coverage area, you can open the message in the Drafts  
folder and send it.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
145  
                               
Messaging Tips  
You can address messages to multiple recipients by separating the addresses with a  
comma.  
When entering message text, you can insert emotive symbols by pressing and holding  
Center  
and selecting emoticons, or insert predefined QuickText phrases by  
selecting QuickText  
and then selecting a phrase. To add a new phrase, select Edit  
QuickText from the list.  
Not all the symbols that are available on your device can be used in your messages. The  
Messaging application automatically replaces invalid characters before it sends  
messages.  
You can send and receive text messages (but not Picture Mail messages) even while you  
are on a phone call. This is easiest when using the hands-free headset or speakerphone.  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
Receiving Messages  
When your phone is on and is in an area of wireless coverage, you automatically receive  
new text messages. You can also configure your device to notify you when a message  
The new message alert may include any of the following buttons:  
OK dismisses the alert and places the message in your Inbox.  
Reply opens Chat view, where you can reply with a text  
message. To reply to a message using Sprint Picture Mail, select  
Add from Chat view.  
Call Back dials the sender’s phone number.  
Go To Msg opens the message so you can view its full contents.  
If the message is a reply to a previous message, the message  
opens in Chat view.  
Go To URL opens the Web browser so you can view the full contents of the message in  
your online Sprint Picture Mail account. See “Working With Your Online Picture Mail  
Delete deletes the received message directly from the message alert.  
If you have multiple alerts, the Alert screen displays all your pending  
alerts. Select an alert to jump to that item, or check the box to clear that  
alert. To view all your pending alerts from any screen on your device,  
press and hold Center on the 5-way.  
Tip:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
147  
         
Using Links in Messages  
When you receive a message that contains a telephone number, email address, or URL, you  
can dial the number, send an email message, or go directly to the Web page.  
1. Press Messaging  
.
2. Select the message that contains the link you want to use.  
3. Select the phone number, email address, or URL (appears as underlined blue text).  
Your device automatically opens the appropriate application from the link.  
Arranging Your Messages  
You can rearrange the messages in any folder by using the  
Sort command.  
1. Press Messaging  
.
2. Select the folder list in the title bar, and then select the folder  
you want to sort.  
3. Press Menu  
.
4. Select View, and then select Sort by Name or Sort by Date.  
Deleting Messages  
You can delete several messages at once from any folder by using the Purge command.  
1. Press Messaging  
.
2. Select the folder list in the title bar, and then select the folder that contains the  
messages you want to delete.  
3. Press Menu  
.
4. Select Purge from the Message menu.  
5. Select the Purge pick list, and then select an option.  
6. Select OK.  
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
Using Messaging to Chat  
When you exchange more than one message with a single contact, the messages you  
exchange with that person are grouped into a chat session. When you select a chat session  
from your message list, the upper part of Chat view displays all text messages you’ve  
exchanged with this contact, and the lower part provides an entry area. You can carry on  
multiple chats at the same time and easily switch between them, using the pick list at the  
top of the screen.  
1. Press Messaging  
.
2. Do one of the following:  
To start a new chat, select a message and reply to it.  
To continue an existing chat, select a message with the  
chat icon.  
3. Enter your message.  
4. Select Send.  
To find a chat you had with someone, open your Messaging Inbox and select a chat session.  
To add pictures, sounds, or videos to your message, select Add.  
Tip:  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Managing Your Messages  
The message descriptions in the Inbox, Outbox, and Sent folders show the message status:  
Unread messages appear in bold.  
Read messages appear in plain text.  
Urgent messages appear with a red exclamation point (!).  
The following icons show the message type and additional status information:  
A text message  
A Picture Mail message  
A voicemail page  
A chat session  
A text message with an error  
A Picture Mail message with an error  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Customizing Your Messaging Settings  
1. Press Messaging  
2. Press Menu  
.
.
3. Select Options, and then select Preferences.  
4. On the Messages tab, set any of the following preferences for  
your individual messages:  
New message indicates whether you default to a text  
message or a Sprint Picture Mail message when you create  
a new message.  
Confirm message deletions indicates whether deletion  
confirmation prompts appear.  
Privacy Mode (hide text) indicates whether the body text  
appears in the alert when you receive a new message.  
5. Select the Chat tab and set any of the following preferences  
for chat sessions:  
Create chats from messages indicates when you want to  
group text messages from the same person into a chat.  
Show timestamps in chats displays next to each message  
the local date and time the message was sent.  
Display my name in chat window as indicates the text  
label for your messages in Chat view.  
Label color sets a color to differentiate your messages from the sender’s messages  
in Chat view.  
Use color for indicates whether both your name and message appear in a  
different color, or only your name.  
6. Select OK.  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
Selecting Messaging Alert Tones  
1. Press Messaging  
2. Press Menu  
.
.
3. Select Options, and then select Alerts.  
4. Select the Application pick list, and then select Messaging.  
5. Select the Volume pick list, and then select the volume level.  
6. Select the Vibrate pick list, and then select when you want  
the vibrate option to turn on.  
7. Select the Message Tone pick list, and then select a tone for  
incoming message alerts.  
8. Check the Show Message Alerts box if you want to see an onscreen alert when a new  
message arrives.  
9. Select Done.  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Using Online Services  
Sprint Picture Mail Online Services let you access printing and other services for photos and  
videos when you compose and send a Picture Mail message from your Centro device. For  
example, if you send a message containing a picture, you can select an online printing  
service to print and deliver a copy of the picture to you. Additional fees may be required to  
use Online Services.  
Accessing Online Services  
1. Press Messaging  
.
2. Select Online Services  
in the lower-right corner of the screen.  
3. If prompted, enter or create a password.  
4. If the Welcome! screen appears, select Continue.  
5. Select the service you want to use.  
6. Create your Picture Mail message as described in “Creating and Sending a Sprint  
Picture Mail Message” on page 144. The media you include with the message is sent  
to the service you select for processing.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
153  
               
Using Sprint Instant Messaging  
Sprint Instant Messaging (IM) is a form of real-time communication between two or more  
people based on the exchange of short, simple text messages via computer or smart  
device. You can see which of your contacts are available to participate in an IM conversation  
or chat. You initiate a chat by selecting an available contact and sending a message.  
Instant messaging on your Centro device is similar to instant messaging on your computer.  
Using the IM application, you can sign on to up to three IM communities, send and receive  
instant messages, and view contact status information, and manage your presence. You  
can switch among IM communities with a touch of the 5-way.  
Messages are billed to the owner of the device no matter which IM account you use.  
Signing On to IM  
If you are signing on to your existing IM account on your Centro smart device, sign on to the  
community using your existing username or email address, whichever your provider  
requires, and password.  
Some service providers allow you to sign on to multiple devices at the  
same time; for example, both your Centro smart device and your  
computer. On other providers, signing on to an existing IM account on  
your smart device may automatically sign you out of another currently  
running IM session. After signing on to IM, you can receive messages and  
alerts even if IM is not the active application.  
Note:  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
1. Press Applications  
and select IM  
.
2. Select an IM community.  
3. Enter your username and password in the form requested by  
the IM community.  
4. (Optional) Select Save Password to have your password stored  
in IM.  
5. (Optional) Select Auto Sign On to automatically sign on to the  
IM community whenever you select it.  
6. Select Done or Sign On.  
Once you sign on, you can add contacts to establish a list of people you want to correspond  
with via Instant Messaging. You can also indicate whether or not you are available for  
Instant Messaging.  
Sending a Message  
You can select Quick Text and emoticons to make your messages quick and easy to enter or  
you can simply enter text in the usual way.  
1. Sign on to an IM community.  
2. Select Send Message To and select a recipient from your contacts list.  
3. Enter the text of your message and select Send.  
Receiving a Message  
You can receive messages as long as you are signed on to an IM community. A beep  
announces the arrival of an IM message.  
1. When you hear a beep, press Applications  
2. Select an IM community you are signed on to. If you don’t see your message, use the  
5-way to switch among IM communities until your message is visible.  
and select IM  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
155  
             
Leaving IM  
You can either exit an IM community or sign out.  
When you select Exit, you can go to other applications and return without signing in  
again. Conversations remain active.  
When you select Sign Out, you are asked to confirm that you want to terminate the  
session and end all active conversations. When you confirm, you officially sign out, and  
your contacts see you as unavailable. To resume instant messaging, you must sign in  
again to the IM provider.  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Section 3D  
Browsing the Web  
In This Section  
The Web browser on your Palm Centro™ smart device provides quick and easy access to  
Web pages. You can view most of the sites you use on your computer, including those with  
security and advanced features such as JavaScript and frames. To browse the Web, you  
must activate Sprint Power Vision data services. See “Enabling Sprint Power Vision” on  
Section 3D: Browsing the Web  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
157  
                 
Viewing a Web Page  
The Web browser uses patent-pending technology to optimize Web pages for your device.  
By default, the browser reformats Web pages into a single column and resizes images on  
your screen. That way, you can see most of the content without scrolling left or right.  
2. Press Applications  
and confirm that data services are available. You should see  
icon.  
either the  
or the  
If you do not see either of the above icons, data services are not available  
in your current location and you cannot connect to the Internet.  
Note:  
3. Select Web  
.
4. Enter a Web page address (URL) in the address bar and select  
Go. If you browse to a secure Web page, a lock  
appears in  
the address bar.  
5. Do any of the following to navigate within the Web page:  
View a page in wide layout format (as on your computer):  
Press Menu  
, select Options, and then select Wide  
Page Mode.  
Scroll through the page: In Optimized Mode (the default  
format, which is optimized for your device screen), press Up  
or Down . In  
Wide Page Mode, press Up , Down , Left , or Right to scroll in all  
directions.  
158  
Section 3D: Browsing the Web  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
Follow a link to another Web page: In Optimized Mode, highlight the link by  
pressing Up , Down , Left , or Right , and then press Center  
to go to  
the selected page.  
In Wide Page Mode, use the stylus to tap a link.  
Tip:  
Submit a form: Enter the information and then select the onscreen button to  
submit the form. If the form doesn’t have an onscreen button, press Return  
.
6. Use the 5-way  
to access any of the following icons in the title bar:  
To quickly jump to the title bar from anywhere on a Web page, press  
Tip:  
Space to go to the address bar, and then press Up on the 5-way.  
Goes to the previous Web page.  
Goes to the next Web page.  
Refreshes the page with the latest content from the Internet.  
Opens a list where you can select Fast Mode (no images or style  
sheets) or Normal Mode (with images and style sheets).  
Opens a dialog box where you can enter a Web address you want  
to go to or view a list of recently viewed Web pages.  
Goes to your home page.  
Displays a list of your bookmarks and saved pages.  
Section 3D: Browsing the Web  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
159  
       
The navigation bar shows status information while a page is loading.  
You don’t have to wait for a page to fully load to navigate within the  
page or to select a link to another page. However, if you select a link  
while a page is loading and you receive a message saying that JavaScript  
is not ready, wait for the page to finish loading and then select the link  
again.  
Tip:  
160  
Section 3D: Browsing the Web  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Working With Web Pages  
Downloading Files From a Web Page  
The Web browser lets you download files that are recognized by one of the applications on  
your device. When you download a file, you can open it in the application that recognizes  
the file. For example, if you download a picture, you can view it later in the Pics&Videos  
application. If a file is not recognized by any of the applications on your device, you can  
download the file to an expansion card, but you cannot open it on your device.  
You can download files such as new applications, and choose to play or save music and  
video files in many popular formats—provided that the Web site permits the downloading  
of files.  
Item  
Supported File Types  
JPEG, BMP, WBMP, GIF, PNG  
MP4, 3G2, ASF  
Pictures  
Videos  
Ringtones  
Music  
MIDI, QCELP, AAC, AAC+  
MP3  
1. Go to the page that contains the link to the file you want to download.  
2. Press Left or Right to highlight the link to the file, and then press Center  
.
3. If prompted, select what you want to do with the file: Play, Save To Device, or Save To  
Card.  
4. Select Yes.  
You can also save an image from a Web page by tapping and holding it  
with the stylus. In addition, you can access software and other  
downloads using the Downloads bookmark.  
Tip:  
Section 3D: Browsing the Web  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
161  
                 
Streaming Files From a Web Page  
The Web browser lets you stream files that are recognized by one of the applications on  
your device. For example, you can choose to play music and video files in many popular  
formats, such as MP3, WMA, and WMV.  
1. When the Web browser recognizes streamed content on a Web page, it displays a Play  
icon. To view or listen to the streamed content, tap Play  
.
2. Once streaming begins, playback starts automatically. Use the following controls  
when viewing or listening:  
Select  
Select  
to return to the original Web page.  
or press Center  
to pause playback.  
Select  
pausing.  
or press Center  
to resume playback after  
A few seconds after playback begins, the toolbar is hidden  
and you can view the content on the full screen. Press Up  
or Down  
Down again to hide the toolbar again.  
Press the Volume button on the side of your device to adjust the volume.  
to display the toolbar; press Up  
or  
If the Web browser recognizes streamed content that is not supported  
by any application on your device, a “Media type not supported”  
message appears.  
Note:  
162  
Section 3D: Browsing the Web  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Copying Text From a Web Page  
You can copy text from a Web page and paste it into other applications.  
1. Use the stylus to highlight the text you want to copy.  
2. Press Menu  
.
3. Select Edit, and then select Copy.  
4. Go to the application in which you want to paste the text, and then use the  
5-way  
or the stylus to position the cursor where you want to paste the text.  
.
5. Press Menu  
6. Select Edit, and then select Paste.  
Returning to Recently Viewed Pages  
The History list stores the addresses of the last one hundred pages you visited. Items in the  
History list are sorted chronologically.  
1. From Page view, press Menu  
.
2. Select History from the Page menu.  
3. Press Down  
to navigate through the list.  
4. Select the Web page you want to load.  
To clear all items from the History list, select Clear All. To bookmark any  
Tip:  
page on the list, highlight the page and then select Bookmark. If you  
clear all History list items, the Web browser does not suggest any entries  
when you begin entering a Web address, even if you have the  
Auto-complete feature turned on (see “Customizing Your Web Browser  
Settings” on page 167 for information on Auto-complete).  
Section 3D: Browsing the Web  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
163  
         
Finding Text on a Web Page  
1. From Page view, press Menu  
.
2. Select Find Text on Page on the Page menu.  
3. Enter the text you want to find.  
4. Check or uncheck the Wrap Search box to indicate whether you want the search to  
wrap from the end of the page to the beginning when the search reaches the end of  
the page.  
5. Select Find to start the search.  
164  
Section 3D: Browsing the Web  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Working With Bookmarks and Saved Pages  
Creating a Bookmark  
With bookmarks, you can quickly access a Web page without entering the address every  
time. The Web browser can store up to one hundred bookmarks or saved pages, allowing  
you to open your favorite Web pages quickly. Note that a bookmark is different from a  
1. Go to the page you want to bookmark.  
2. Press Menu  
.
3. Select Add Bookmark from the Page menu.  
4. (Optional) Change the entries in the Name and Description  
fields.  
5. Select OK, and then select OK again.  
Saving a Page  
You can use the Web browser to save a page for offline viewing, so that you don’t need an  
Internet connection to view it later.  
1. Go to the page you want to save.  
2. Press Menu  
.
3. Select Save Page from the Page menu.  
4. Select OK, and then select OK again.  
Section 3D: Browsing the Web  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Viewing Bookmarks or Saved Pages  
Bookmarks and saved pages appear in Bookmarks view. Saved  
pages are indicated by a small triangle in the upper-right corner of  
the bookmark.  
1. Select the Bookmarks  
icon.  
2. Select the bookmark or saved page you want to view.  
Editing or Deleting a Bookmark or Saved Page  
1. From Bookmarks view, press Menu  
.
2. Select Edit Bookmarks from the Bookmarks menu.  
3. Select the bookmark or saved page you want to edit or delete.  
4. Enter the desired changes.  
5. Select OK.  
Arranging Bookmarks and Saved Pages  
Bookmarks view includes ten pages of bookmarks, so that you can arrange bookmarks and  
saved pages in a logical fashion. For example, you can store travel links on one page, stock  
links on another, and business links on a third page.  
1. From Bookmarks view, press Menu  
.
2. Select Edit Bookmarks on the Bookmarks menu.  
3. Enter a title for this page of bookmarks.  
4. Use the stylus to drag and drop a bookmark into another slot  
on the current page of bookmarks. To move a bookmark to a  
different page, drag and drop it onto the Bookmark Page  
icon.  
5. Select OK.  
166  
Section 3D: Browsing the Web  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Customizing Your Web Browser Settings  
1. Press Menu  
.
2. Select Options, and then select Preferences.  
3. Select Page and set any of the following preferences:  
Start With indicates which view is displayed every time you  
open the Web browser.  
Home Page indicates which Web page appears when you  
select  
.
Restore Default resets the home page to the original Sprint  
Power Vision home page if you changed it.  
Show Address Bar indicates whether the Web address  
appears in Page view. When the address bar is visible, you  
can select the pick list next to it to go to a previously viewed page, or enter a URL  
directly from Page view.  
4. Select General and set any of the following preferences:  
Auto-complete indicates whether the Web browser  
suggests text, based on your previous entries, when you  
enter information.  
Disable cookies indicates whether Web sites can store  
personalized information on your Centro device. Some  
sites do not work properly if you select this option.  
Disable Javascript bypasses JavaScript elements on the  
Web pages you view.  
Tap and Drag indicates whether dragging the stylus selects text or scrolls through  
the content of the page.  
Section 3D: Browsing the Web  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
167  
                     
Normal mode/Fast mode indicates whether you want to hide selected items so  
that Web pages load faster. When you select Fast Mode, you can set the following  
options:  
- Disable cascading style sheets indicates whether style sheets are applied when  
you load a Web page. When style sheets are disabled, pages download faster,  
but you may lose some of the formatting.  
- Don’t download images! indicates whether images appear when you load a  
Web page. If you select not to view images, you can still see any image by  
tapping and holding the placeholder box on the Web page with the stylus.  
5. Select Advanced and set any of the following preferences:  
Set memory limit for storing pages sets the amount of  
memory used for your cache. Pages are cached so that they  
load faster the next time you view them.  
Cookies indicates how much memory is being used by  
cookies. To free up this memory, select Clear Cookies.  
Cache indicates how much memory is being used by your  
cache to store recent pages and history. To free up this  
memory, select Clear Cache.  
Clear cache on exit indicates whether the cache clears each time you exit the Web  
browser.  
Set Proxy sets up a proxy server to access the Internet. If your connection requires  
a proxy server, please contact your Internet service provider or IT administrator for  
this information.  
6. Select OK.  
Setting a proxy server may prevent you from accessing some Sprint  
Power Vision Web pages.  
Note:  
168  
Section 3D: Browsing the Web  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                               
Section 3E  
®
Using Bluetooth Wireless Technology and  
Dial-Up Networking  
In This Section  
Section 3E: Bluetooth/DUN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
169  
   
Connecting to Devices With Bluetooth Wireless Technology  
With your Palm Centro™ smart device’s built-in Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can  
connect to a number of devices enabled with Bluetooth wireless technology, such as a  
headset, car kit, printer, or GPS receiver, as well as to other phones and handhelds. When  
you connect to another device, you create a partnership (also referred to by terms such as  
trusted pair, trusted device, or pairing) with that device. If your computer is enabled with  
Bluetooth wireless technology, you can also synchronize wirelessly or use your phone as a  
wireless modem.  
You can create a list of Bluetooth devices that you trust to communicate with your  
Centro device. When communicating with trusted devices, your Centro device skips the  
discovery process and creates a secure link as long as the device is within range. Bluetooth  
range is up to 30 feet (10 meters) in ideal conditions. Performance and range are affected  
by physical obstacles, radio interference from nearby electronic equipment, and other  
factors.  
page 80), the headset is automatically added to your trusted device list. Follow the steps in  
this section to add other devices to your trusted device list, such as your computer or GPS  
device enabled with Bluetooth technology.  
Entering Basic Bluetooth Settings  
To use your Centro device’s Bluetooth functionality, you need to turn the Bluetooth feature  
on, and you may need to make your device either temporarily or permanently visible. You  
can also enter a name for your device.  
170  
Section 3E: Bluetooth/DUN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
1. Press Applications  
and select Bluetooth  
.
2. Select Bluetooth On.  
3. (Optional) Enter a device name that identifies your  
Centro device when it is discovered by other Bluetooth  
devices.  
Use the same device name for all your Bluetooth connections. If you  
Note:  
change the device name, you need to re-create any partnerships you  
have already created.  
4. Select the Visibility pick list and select one of the following:  
Visible enables Bluetooth devices that are not on your Trusted Device list to  
request a connection with your device. Your device remains accessible to other  
devices until you turn this option off.  
Temporary enables Bluetooth devices that are not on your Trusted Device list to  
request a connection with your device during the next two minutes. Your device  
reverts to the Hidden setting and becomes inaccessible to other devices after two  
minutes.  
For your Centro device to be visible to other Bluetooth devices, the  
Bluetooth setting must be set to On, and visibility must be set to Visible  
or Temporary. Your Centro device screen does not need to be turned on. If  
you are requesting a connection with another device, or if you are  
accepting a request from a trusted device, your Centro device can be set  
to any of the Visibility options.  
Important:  
Section 3E: Bluetooth/DUN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
171  
         
Hidden allows only devices with which you have previously formed a partnership  
to request a connection with your Centro device. New devices cannot request a  
connection.  
Requesting a Connection With Another Bluetooth Device  
1. Press Applications  
and select Bluetooth  
.
2. If you have not already done so, enter the basic Bluetooth settings as described in  
3. Select Setup Devices.  
4. Select Trusted Devices.  
5. Select Add Device. (The Discovery icon appears, indicating that  
the discovery process is active.)  
6. Select the Show pick list and select Nearby devices.  
7. Select the device you want to connect with from the Discovery  
Results list, and then select OK.  
If the device you’re adding isn’t in the Discovery Results list, make sure  
the device is ready to connect (see the device’s documentation), and  
then select Find More on your Centro device to search again.  
Note:  
8. Enter the same passkey on your Centro device and on the Bluetooth device, and then  
select OK.  
9. Select Done, and then select Done again to return to the Bluetooth screen.  
172  
Section 3E: Bluetooth/DUN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Some Bluetooth devices have a predefined passkey. If your device has a  
predefined passkey, you can find the passkey in the documentation for  
that device. Other Bluetooth devices provide a screen where you enter a  
passkey that you make up. In either case, you must use the same passkey  
on both your Centro device and your Bluetooth device. We recommend  
that, where possible, you make up a passkey of 16 alphanumeric  
characters (letters and numerals only) to improve the security of your  
Centro device. The longer the passkey, the more difficult it is for the  
passkey to be deciphered.  
Important:  
Accepting a Connection From Another Bluetooth Device  
1. To prepare your Centro device to be able to accept a connection from a requesting  
device, enter the basic Bluetooth settings as described in “Entering Basic Bluetooth  
2. Enter the same passkey on your Centro device and on the Bluetooth device.  
3. If you want to form a partnership with the requesting device, check the Add to  
trusted device list box.  
4. Select OK.  
Make sure you close the Bluetooth application after you set up devices  
Note:  
and partnerships.  
Section 3E: Bluetooth/DUN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
173  
             
Using Your Device as a Wireless Modem  
Dial-up networking (DUN) is the feature that converts the phone on your Centro device into  
a modem so that you can access the Internet from your computer. You can set up DUN in  
one of two ways:  
If you have signed up on a Sprint Power Vision with Phone as Modem plan, you can use  
the Sprint Connection Manager software on your computer and connect your  
Centro device to your computer using the USB sync cable; see “Using Your Device’s  
If your computer is enabled with Bluetooth wireless technology, you can set up your  
Centro device as a wireless modem using the built-in Bluetooth technology.  
This section describes the process of setting up your device as a wireless modem using the  
built-in Bluetooth technology.  
Creating a DUN Connection Using Bluetooth Technology  
To configure DUN using Bluetooth technology, complete the following procedures:  
174  
Section 3E: Bluetooth/DUN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Creating a Partnership Between Your Device and Your Computer  
If your computer is not enabled with Bluetooth wireless technology, you  
may be able to purchase a wireless Bluetooth adapter accessory for your  
computer.  
Note:  
1. Make sure that your computer’s Bluetooth setting is on and  
that your computer is ready to create a Bluetooth partnership.  
Check the documentation that came with your computer to  
find and change these settings.  
2. On your device, press Applications  
Bluetooth  
and select  
.
3. Select Bluetooth On if it is not selected, and then select  
Setup Devices.  
4. Select Trusted Devices.  
5. Select Add Device. The discovery icon appears, indicating that  
the discovery process is active.  
6. Select your computer from the Trusted Devices list, and then  
select OK.  
7. Enter a passkey on the Bluetooth Security screen, and then  
select OK. The passkey can be any number of up to 16  
characters.  
8. Enter the same passkey number on your computer when prompted.  
9. Select Done, and then select Done again to return to the Bluetooth screen.  
You must enter the same passkey on your device and your computer. We  
recommend that you use a passkey of 16 digits, where possible, to  
improve the security of your Centro device. The longer the passkey, the  
more difficult it is for the passkey to be deciphered.  
Note:  
Section 3E: Bluetooth/DUN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
175  
         
Setting Up Your Computer for a Bluetooth DUN Connection  
Dial-up networking must be enabled or installed on your computer. Follow the instructions  
from the manufacturer of your Bluetooth adapter to enable DUN. Your wireless service  
provider may provide customized software programs that walk you through the DUN setup  
process. Check with your wireless service provider to see if such a program is available.  
Accessing the Internet Using a Bluetooth DUN Connection  
The steps for accessing the Internet on your computer may vary depending on your  
operating system and how Bluetooth wireless technology is set up on your computer—for  
example, if it is built-in versus if you are using a wireless Bluetooth adapter. If the following  
procedure does not work with your computer, check your computer’s documentation for  
how to set up Bluetooth technology to access the Internet using a DUN connection.  
You may need to use a virtual private network (VPN) to access corporate  
email. Check with your system administrator for more information.  
Note:  
Before you begin, verify that DUN is enabled on both your computer and your device.  
1. Open the Bluetooth screen on your computer and look for  
the option for paired devices. Check your computer’s  
documentation for how to open this screen and for the  
name of the paired devices option.  
2. Double-click the icon or option representing your device.  
Your computer connects to your device and shows that DUN  
services are available.  
3. Double-click the DUN icon.  
4. Enter the following in the Dial field: #777. You do not need  
to enter anything in the User Name or Password field.  
5. Click Dial. Once the connection is successfully established, you can browse the  
Internet on your computer or download your email.  
176  
Section 3E: Bluetooth/DUN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
You may be asked if you want to remember this dial text for this  
connection. We recommend that you choose to remember the dial text  
to avoid errors and the inconvenience of entering it for every session.  
Tip:  
To verify that you are connected, look for a network connection icon in the taskbar at the  
bottom of your computer screen. To check the status of the connection, right-click the  
Bluetooth network icon.  
When a Bluetooth DUN connection is active, you cannot form a  
partnership with another device or discover another device. You also  
cannot send or receive information wirelessly directly from your device,  
browse the Web, or send or receive email messages, and any scheduled  
automatic email retrievals do not take place. Incoming calls are  
automatically sent to voicemail. You can make outgoing calls, but the  
DUN session terminates when you place the call.  
Note:  
Terminating a Bluetooth DUN Internet Session  
On your computer, right-click the icon or option representing your device, and then click  
Disconnect.  
Section 3E: Bluetooth/DUN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
177  
   
178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 4  
Your Portable Media Device  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 4A  
Working With Your Pictures and Videos  
In This Section  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
181  
   
Taking Pictures and Videos  
Your Palm Centro™ smart device comes with an easy-to-use, built-in, 1.3-megapixel camera  
with 2x digital zoom. You can use the camera to take and view pictures and videos and  
send them to your friends and family. To add a personal touch to your device, use your  
pictures as your wallpaper in the Main view of the Phone application, and as caller ID  
images.  
You can also upload pictures and videos to albums on the Sprint Picture Mail Web site  
(www.sprint.com/picturemail), move them to an expansion card, and copy them to your  
Windows computer by synchronizing your device with your computer.  
Additional fees may apply for Sprint Picture Mail service. Contact Sprint for additional  
information.  
The camera defaults to 1.3 megapixel (1280 x 1024) resolution. The  
camera also supports VGA (640 x 480) and QVGA (320 x 240) resolution.  
The camcorder defaults to CIF (352 x 288) resolution and also supports  
QCIF (176 x 144) resolution. See “Customizing Your Camera Settings” on  
page 186 for information on accessing camera and camcorder settings.  
Note:  
Taking a Picture  
1. Press Applications  
and select Camera  
.
2. By default, the Camera application stores pictures you take in the Palm album on your  
device. If you have an expansion card inserted into your device’s expansion card slot,  
the Camera application creates a Palm album on the card and stores pictures there. To  
182  
Section 4A: Pictures & Videos  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
store the picture in a different location, select the album pick list in the lower-right  
corner of the screen, and then do one of the following:  
Select <Album name> to store the picture in the selected  
album. The storage location is based on the location of the  
album (device or expansion card).  
Select New Albums to open a dialog box where you can  
enter an album name and select the storage location  
(device or expansion card).  
3. (Optional) Adjust the zoom setting by pressing Up to select  
2x or pressing Down to select 1x.  
Album  
Pick List  
4. Point the lens on the back of your device at the subject you  
want to photograph.  
5. Press Center  
to take the picture.  
6. Select one of the following buttons:  
Saves the picture in the location you selected in step 2.  
Deletes the picture.  
Lets you add a voice caption.  
Opens a list of options for sending the picture:  
Select Send with PictureMail to send the picture as part of a Picture Mail message  
Select Send with Online Services to send the picture using one of the available  
Sprint Power Vision Online Services (see “Using Online Services” on page 153).  
Select Upload to Online Albums to upload the picture to your online album (see  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
183  
                   
Recording a Video  
1. Press Applications  
and select Camcorder  
.
2. By default, the Camcorder application stores videos you record in the Palm album on  
your device. If you have an expansion card inserted into your device’s expansion card  
slot, the Camcorder application creates a Palm album on the card and stores videos  
there. To store the video in a different location, select the album pick list in the  
lower-right corner of the screen, and then do one of the following:  
Select <Album name> to store the video in the selected  
album. The storage location is based on the location of  
the album (device or expansion card).  
Select New Albums to open a dialog box where you can  
enter an album name and select the storage location  
(device or expansion card).  
3. Adjust the position of your device until you see the subject  
you want to record on the screen.  
Album  
Pick List  
4. Press Center  
to start recording.  
5. After you finish recording, press Center  
again to stop.  
6. Select one of the following buttons:  
Begins playback.  
Saves the video in the location you selected in step 2.  
Deletes the video.  
Opens a dialog box where you can adjust the volume  
during playback.  
184  
Section 4A: Pictures & Videos  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Opens a list of options for sending the video:  
Select Send with PictureMail to send the video as part of a Picture Mail message  
Select Send with Online Services to send the video using one of the available  
Sprint Power Vision Online Services (see “Using Online Services” on page 153).  
Select Upload to Online Albums to upload the video to your online album (see  
The video recording screen displays the approximate recording time you  
have left, based on the space available on your device or expansion card.  
Actual recording time may vary depending on how fast you are moving,  
how many colors you are recording, and so on.  
Note:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
185  
           
Customizing Your Camera Settings  
You can customize the built-in camera’s settings for your Centro device.  
1. Open Camera or Camcorder, and then press Menu  
Photo Settings screen appears. If you are in Camcorder view, the Video Settings  
screen appears.  
. If you are in Camera view, the  
2. Adjust any of the following settings:  
Effects sets the color palette for the current picture or  
video. You can’t change an item’s palette after you take the  
picture or video.  
Prompt sound (Pictures only) sets the sound that plays  
before you take the picture.  
Shutter sound indicates whether a sound is played when  
you take a picture.  
Microphone (Videos only) turns the microphone on and off  
so that you can record videos with or without sound.  
Resolution sets the default size for newly captured  
pictures or videos.  
Date stamp (Photos only) indicates whether the date the  
picture is taken appears on your pictures.  
Review photos/videos indicates whether you can review  
pictures or videos before saving them and how quickly they are automatically  
saved.  
Auto naming assigns a name to a series of pictures to be captured, such as  
Seattle001, Seattle002, and so on.  
3. Select Done.  
186  
Section 4A: Pictures & Videos  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                               
Viewing Pictures and Videos  
Viewing a Picture  
In addition to viewing the pictures you capture with the built-in camera, you can view  
pictures captured on many popular digital cameras or downloaded from the Internet. Your  
device supports the following picture formats:  
JPG  
BMP  
TIF  
GIF  
1. Press Applications  
and select Pics&Videos  
.
2. Select the album that contains the picture you want to see.  
3. Select the picture you want to view.  
4. Press Right or Left to scroll to the next item in the album.  
5. If the picture has a voice caption, select  
to hear it.  
6. Tap the photo or press Center to return to Thumbnail view.  
You can also send a photo or video from Thumbnail view. Select the  
photo or video, select the Send icon in the lower-right corner of the  
screen, and then select the sending option you want.  
Tip:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
187  
                   
Viewing a Video  
In addition to viewing the videos you capture with the built-in camcorder, you can view  
videos captured on many popular digital video cameras.  
1. Press Applications  
and select Pics&Videos  
.
2. Select the album that contains the video you want to see.  
3. Select the video you want to view. Playback begins automatically.  
4. Hold down Right or Left to seek within the current video, or press Right or  
Left to scroll to the next item in the album.  
5. Tap the video or press Center  
to return to Thumbnail view.  
Viewing a Slide Show  
1. Press Applications  
2. Highlight or select the album you want to view.  
3. (Optional) Press Menu , select Options, and then select Auto-hide Toolbar On.  
to start the slide show.  
and select Pics&Videos  
.
4. Press Space  
5. Tap the screen to return to the previous view.  
To set slide show options such as background music and transitions,  
Tip:  
open the Album menu and select Slideshow Setting. Keep in mind that  
background music overrides audio captions when you’re running a slide  
show. Background music for a slide show also overrides any music that is  
playing using the Pocket Tunes™ application on your device if you start a  
slide show.  
188  
Section 4A: Pictures & Videos  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Organizing Pictures and Videos  
After you take pictures and record videos, you can organize them into albums on your  
device or use your online album (see “Using Your Online Album” on page 193).  
Creating Albums on Your Device  
1. Press Applications  
and select Pics&Videos  
.
2. Select Create New Album.  
3. Enter an album name, and then select OK.  
If you have an expansion card inserted into your device’s expansion card  
slot, you can choose to create the album on the card.  
Tip:  
Arranging Albums  
After you create an album, you can add items to or remove items from that album.  
1. Press Applications  
and select Pics&Videos  
.
2. Select the album you want to organize.  
From Thumbnail view, select the List/Thumbnail icon to the right of the  
Camera icon in the lower-left corner of the screen to display the list of  
albums.  
Tip:  
3. Do one of the following:  
To add pictures or videos to an album, select  
, or press Menu  
, select Album,  
and then select Add to Album.  
To remove pictures or videos from an album, press Menu  
, select Album, and  
then select Remove from Album.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
189  
                   
4. Select the pictures or videos that you want to add or remove, or select Select All to  
add or remove the entire album. (A plus sign [+] indicates that you want to add the  
item; an X indicates that you want to remove the item.)  
5. Select Add or Remove.  
Copying Pictures and Videos  
You can copy pictures and videos into another album. You can also copy pictures and videos  
between your device and an expansion card.  
Install the Palm® Files application to easily browse and manage pictures  
and videos on an expansion card. Press Applications, select My Centro,  
select the Bonus tab, and then select Files.  
Tip:  
1. Press Applications  
and select Pics&Videos  
.
2. Select the album that contains the picture(s) or video(s) you want to copy.  
From Camera view or Camcorder view, select the icon in the lower-left  
Tip:  
corner of the screen to display the list of albums.  
3. Press Menu  
.
4. Select Copy to from the Photo (or Video)  
PlusSign(+)  
Indicates  
That an Item  
Is Selected  
menu.  
5. Select the pictures or videos that you  
want to copy, or select Select All to copy  
the entire album. (A plus sign [+] appears  
next to selected items.)  
6. Select Copy.  
190  
Section 4A: Pictures & Videos  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
7. Select the Copy items to pick list and select whether you want to copy the selected  
items to your device or to an expansion card.  
8. Select the Into album pick list and select the album you want to copy the selected  
items to.  
9. Select Copy.  
You can also move pictures and videos between albums. Open the Photo  
(or Video) menu and select Move to. The remaining steps are the same  
as those for copying pictures, but the command names display Move  
instead of Copy.  
Tip:  
Saving a Picture as Wallpaper  
You can select a picture to use as wallpaper for the Main view in the Phone application.  
1. Open the picture you want to save as wallpaper.  
2. Press Menu  
.
3. Select Options, and then select Save as Wallpaper.  
4. When the confirmation message appears, confirm by selecting Yes, or decline by  
selecting No.  
Press Phone to view the new wallpaper in the Phone application.  
Tip:  
Adding a Picture to a Contact Entry  
1. Open the picture you want to add to a contact.  
2. Press Menu  
.
3. Select Options, and then select Save as Contact.  
4. Select the contact you want to add this picture to.  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Rotating a Picture  
1. Open the picture you want to rotate.  
2. Press Menu  
.
3. Select Rotate from the Photo menu.  
4. Select the orientation.  
Deleting a Picture or Video  
1. Open the album that contains the picture(s) or video(s) you want to delete.  
2. Press Menu  
.
3. Select Delete from the Photo (or Video) menu.  
4. Select the pictures or videos that you want to delete, or select Select All to delete the  
entire album. (An X appears next to the selected items.)  
5. Select Delete.  
6. Select Delete to confirm the deletion.  
You can also highlight a picture or video in Thumbnail view, and then  
Tip:  
press Backspace on your device keyboard to delete the highlighted item.  
192  
Section 4A: Pictures & Videos  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Using Your Online Album  
Uploading Pictures to Your Online Album  
Your Sprint Picture Mail account includes an online album on the Sprint Picture Mail Web  
site. You can use your online album to store and view pictures from your device or from a  
computer with Internet access.  
If you have not previously accessed your online album or used Sprint  
Picture Mail Online Services, you are prompted to create a password.  
Note:  
1. Press Applications  
and select Pics&Videos  
.
2. Select the album that contains the picture(s) or video(s) you  
want to upload.  
3. Select  
, and then select Upload to Online Albums.  
4. Select the picture(s) or video(s) you want to upload.  
5. Select Upload.  
Working With Your Online Picture Mail Album  
1. Press Applications  
and select Pics&Videos  
.
2. Select the album pick list in the upper-right corner of the  
screen, and then select Online.  
3. Select the online album you want to view.  
4. Follow the steps described in “Viewing a Picture” on page 187  
or “Viewing a Video” on page 188 to view a picture or video.  
You can also download and play videos from your online album, and you  
can listen to voice captions that are attached to pictures, too.  
Tip:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
193  
                         
Viewing Pictures and Videos on Your Computer  
When you synchronize your smart device, your pictures and videos are copied to your  
desktop computer. You can view pictures in JPEG format and videos in MPEG-4 format (.3G2  
file extension). You can email them to friends by using your desktop email application.  
On a Windows computer, you can view and edit synchronized pictures and videos in the  
Palm Media desktop application. Open Palm® Desktop software and click the Media icon.  
You can refer to the Palm Desktop Online Help for information about using the Palm Media  
desktop application.  
You can also view, download, and manage your pictures and videos from  
Tip:  
your computer at www.sprint.com/picturemail.  
194  
Section 4A: Pictures & Videos  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Section 4B  
Listening to Music  
In This Section  
You can listen to music through the speaker on the back of your device, or through stereo  
headphones. To listen to music, you need to transfer music files from a desktop application  
such as Sprint Music Manager or Windows Media® Player (Windows computers) or iTunes  
(Mac computers). You can then play the music files using the Pocket Tunes Deluxe™  
application. Pocket Tunes Deluxe supports MP3, AAC, AAC+, eAAC+, WMA, and WMA DRM  
file formats.  
From a Windows computer, you can transfer music files to your smart  
device or to an expansion card (sold separately). Mac users must transfer  
music files to an expansion card.  
Important:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
195  
                       
Sprint Music Manager Overview  
Sprint Music Manager is a Windows desktop application that keeps all your favorite tunes  
organized and available. Use Sprint Music Manager to purchase and download music from  
the Sprint Music Store, copy music files from a CD to your PC, and organize all your songs  
into playlists.  
Sprint Music Manager is not supported on Mac computers. See  
information on using a Mac to transfer music files.  
Note:  
This section includes the following topics:  
To transfer your music to your device, refer to “Transferring Music Files From Your Computer  
Sprint Music Manager Overview  
To install the Sprint Music Manager desktop software on a Windows PC, follow these  
instructions:  
1. Close any applications that are currently running on your computer, including those  
that are minimized. (Your computer must have all its resources available to install the  
software.)  
2. Insert the Palm Software Installation CD into the CD drive on your computer.  
196  
Section 4B: Music  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
3. Double-click the Sprint Music Manager installation option to launch the Sprint Music  
Manager Installation Wizard. (When the installation wizard opens, follow the  
onscreen instructions.)  
4. Click Finish to complete the process and reboot your computer. (Rebooting your  
computer completes the installation of the application and phone drivers.)  
Accessing the Quick Start Guide  
When you first open the Sprint Music Manager application on your computer, an onscreen  
Quick Start Guide provides tutorials for the main features.  
Click on a topic to view a tutorial of that subject.  
To display the Quick Start Guide at any time, go to the Help menu, and  
Tip:  
then select Quick Start Guide.  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Downloading and Purchasing Music From the Sprint Music Store  
Use the Sprint Music Manager desktop application to access the Sprint Music Store and  
download music to your computer. You can then transfer the music from your computer to  
your Centro device.  
1. Open the Sprint Music Manager application and select the  
Get tab from the main window.  
2. Enter the username and password for your Sprint online  
account, or click register for access if you are a first-time  
user.  
4. To purchase a song, click a title to highlight it, and then click Buy It Now. (A  
confirmation message appears.)  
5. To download the song, click Download. (When the download is complete, a  
confirmation message appears.)  
198  
Section 4B: Music  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Playing Music With the Sprint Music Manager  
1. Select the Manage tab to list all music files found on your PC.  
2. By default, the music files are organized by category (including Songs, Artists, Albums,  
Genre, My Playlists, and Music Store Downloads.)  
3. Select a category to display the songs for that category.  
4. From the upper-right of the application screen, select one of the following options:  
Repeat  
Rewind  
Play/Pause  
Forward  
Volume  
Shuffle Songs  
Click Play to begin playback of the selected song.  
Click Shuffle Songs to randomize the playback of songs in the active playlist.  
Click Repeat to repeat playback of the entire list of songs in the playlist.  
Click Play/Pause to play or pause the current song.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
199  
 
Click Rewind to play the previous song in the playlist.  
Click Forward to play the next song in the playlist.  
Use the Volume slider to adjust the song’s volume level.  
Searching for Music Files on Your Computer  
1. Launch the Sprint Music Manager application and click the Manage tab.  
2. Click Add Music (bottom-right of the window) to launch the Add Music Wizard.  
3. Select a Search Type:  
Quick Search looks for any new music files that have not already been added to  
the Sprint Music Manager.  
Full Search scans all hard drives and storage devices connected to your computer.  
(This search for all music files is recommended during the initial setup of the  
Music Manager application.)  
Custom Search performs a search for music files within a specified folder.  
4. Place a check next to the music file format(s) you wish to search for (MP3, WMA, MP4,  
and WAV).  
Any compatible WMA files (without DRM [Digital Rights Management]  
restrictions) will be detected by Sprint Music Manager and converted to  
an AAC+ format prior to being uploaded to your device.  
Note:  
5. Click Search to begin the search. (A list of all matching music files found on your  
computer is displayed.)  
6. Click Finish to add the files to Music Manager and return to the Manage tab. (Click  
Back to return to the previous screen and change your search options.)  
200  
Section 4B: Music  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Managing the Files in Your Library  
1. Launch the Sprint Music Manager application and click the Manage tab.  
All music imported into the Music Manager application is analyzed to  
register its file format and file properties such as size, artist information,  
genre, album art, and album information.  
Note:  
2. Click any category within the left pane to see how Music Manager has begun  
organizing your files. Some of these categories include:  
Songs displays a complete list of all music files which have been added to the  
Music Manager database.  
Artists lists songs grouped alphabetically by artist. If an imported song's file  
properties do not contain artist information, it will be grouped into a generic  
Artist category.  
Albums lists songs alphabetically by album.  
Genre lists songs alphabetically by genre.  
My Playlists generates a list of playlists detected on your computer. You can add or  
remove songs from the playlists at any time.  
Music Store Downloads provides a list of songs which have been purchased from  
the Sprint Music Store.  
3. Manage your playlists using the icons at the bottom of the playlist column:  
Click Rename playlist  
to rename the selected playlist.  
to create a new playlist.  
Click Create playlist  
Click Delete playlist to delete the selected playlist.  
4. To reorder songs in a playlist, or to move a song to another playlist, right-click the  
song title and choose an appropriate option from the menu.  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Transferring Music Files From Your Computer (Windows)  
To play songs on your Palm Centro™ smart device, you must copy audio files from a  
computer to your device using the included Pocket TunesDeluxeTM application. Make sure  
the Pocket Tunes Deluxe application is open before you begin. Files can be copied from a  
variety of desktop music applications, including Windows Media Player, Sprint Music  
Manager, and others.  
There may be restrictions that prevent you from downloading, viewing,  
and/or copying a video or music file (for example, DVD, CD, or MP3 file).  
You may also be prohibited from providing copies of the video or music  
file to any third person. It is your responsibility to ensure that you have  
obtained the legal right to use the video or music file for personal use  
and to honor any restrictions imposed by the original content providers.  
Note:  
If an expansion card is inserted into the device, on a Windows computer, the music files are  
copied to an Audio” folder on the expansion card. If you don’t have an expansion card  
inserted, the music files are copied to device memory.  
For more information about Pocket Tunes, visit www.pocket-tunes.com.  
1. If you are transferring from a Mac computer, insert an expansion card into your  
device. This step is optional for Windows users.  
2. Connect your Centro device to your computer with the USB sync cable.  
3. On your device, press Applications  
and select pTunes  
.
202  
Section 4B: Music  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
4. Select Sprint Music Manager from the dialog box.  
5. From the Sprint Music Manager application on your computer,  
select the Transfer tab.  
6. Drag and drop the music files from a playlist to the Music  
Transfer List at the bottom of the screen.  
7. Click Transfer Now to transfer the music from your computer  
to your Centro device.  
If you are using Windows Media Player, you can also select the Windows  
Tip:  
Tip:  
Media Player option. Open Windows Media Player on your computer.  
Select the Sync tab, and then select Palm Handheld from the drop-down  
list. Select Start Sync. Your device must be connected to your computer  
using the sync cable.  
If album art is available, it appears in a corner of the Pocket Tunes display.  
When you select the album art, it expands to fill the screen. Select the  
album art again to return it to a corner of the screen. If you transfer an  
album to your device or SD card that does not have album art, you can  
place a JPEG image of the album into the same folder as the music files  
for that album.  
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Transferring Music Files From Your Computer (Mac)  
On a Mac, use iTunes (included with OS X) to download music or transfer songs from a CD  
to your computer. On a Mac, you must insert an expansion card into the device. You cannot  
transfer music files to device memory from a Mac.  
For more information on using the iTunes software, see the documentation that came with  
your Mac.  
You can also use a card reader accessory (sold separately) to transfer  
music files from your computer to your expansion card. Create a “Audio”  
folder in the root directory of the card, and store your music files in this  
folder.  
Tip:  
To transfer music files from your Mac to your Centro device, do the following:  
1. Drag and drop the music files onto the Send To Handheld droplet in the Palm folder.  
2. Select your device name (username), the file name, and the destination (card).  
3. Click OK.  
4. Synchronize your device with your computer. (Be patient; transferring music to an  
expansion card can take several minutes.)  
If you want greater control over the file size and sound quality of your  
Tip:  
music files, select Custom from the Setting pop-up menu.  
204  
Section 4B: Music  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Transferring Music From a CD to Your Device  
If your songs are on a CD and you want to listen to them on your device, you need to  
convert them to a supported file format on your computer before you transfer the files to  
your device. Pocket Tunes Deluxe supports MP3, AAC, AAC+, eAAC+, WMA, and WMA DRM  
file formats.  
On a Windows computer:  
1. Open Sprint Music Manager.  
2. Insert the music CD into your computer’s CD drive.  
3. Select My Audio CD from the column All Music on My PC.  
4. Select the songs you want to transfer by clicking the box next to the song title. (To  
select all of the songs in the list, click the box at the top of the list.)  
5. Select Rip Audio CD from the Edit menu.  
6. Transfer the music files to your device as described in “Transferring Music Files From  
On a Mac computer:  
1. Open iTunes.  
2. Insert the music CD into your computer’s CD drive.  
3. Click the Import button in the upper-right corner of the iTunes window.  
4. After the songs are imported, click the Eject Disk button in the lower-right corner of  
the iTunes window.  
5. Transfer the files to your device as described in “Transferring Music Files From Your  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
205  
             
Listening to Music on Your Palm Centro™ Smart Device  
1. Press Applications  
and select pTunes  
.
2. Do any of the following:  
To play the current song, select Play  
or press Space  
.
To play the next song, select Next Song  
.
To play the previous song, select Previous Song  
.
To play a different song, select Choose Songs  
and select a song from the list.  
To adjust the volume during playback, press the Volume button on the side of  
your device.  
To pause playback, select Pause  
.
Progress Indicator  
Play/Pause  
Next Song  
Volume  
Choose Songs  
Previous Song  
You can also use the 5-way to navigate among songs, pause and resume  
Tip:  
playback, and adjust the volume during playback.  
206  
Section 4B: Music  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Pocket Tunes Deluxe continues playing until it reaches the end of your list or until you  
select Pause . Music continues to play even if you switch to another application or turn  
off your screen. If you want to stop playing music when you exit Pocket Tunes, open the  
Background Prefs menu, uncheck the Enable Background Playback box, and then select OK.  
If you don’t hear anything when you play a song, make sure the Ringer  
switch is set to Sound On. See “Silencing Sounds” on page 276 for more  
information.  
Tip:  
For complete instructions for using Pocket Tunes Deluxe with your  
Tip:  
Centro device, visit www.pocket-tunes.com.  
Creating a Playlist  
If you want to play a group of songs in a particular order, you can  
create a playlist.  
1. Press Applications  
2. Press Menu  
and select pTunes  
.
.
3. Select Actions, and then select Manage Playlists.  
4. Select New, and then enter a name for the playlist.  
5. Select Add Song. Select the songs you want to include on the playlist.  
6. Select Save List.  
To play songs from a playlist, open Pocket Tunes Deluxe, select Choose Songs, and then  
select Playlists. Select the playlist you want to play, and then select OK.  
207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Editing a Playlist  
1. Press Applications  
and select pTunes  
.
2. Press Menu  
.
3. Select Actions, and then select Manage Playlists.  
4. Highlight the playlist you want to edit, and then select Edit.  
5. Do any of the following:  
To delete a song from the playlist, select the song and then select Remove.  
To add a song, select Add Song, select a song, and then select OK.  
To move a song up or down one slot, select a song and then select Up or Down.  
6. Select Save List.  
To delete a playlist, select Manage Playlists from the Actions menu,  
select the playlist, and then select Delete. Select OK to confirm the  
deletion.  
Tip:  
208  
Section 4B: Music  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Section 4C  
Watching Sprint TVSM  
In This Section  
Section 4C: Sprint TV  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
209  
   
Accessing Streamed Media  
The Sprint TV application enables you to view streamed audio and video media from  
various channels on your Palm Centro™ smart device. You can choose from a list of provided  
channels, or purchase additional channels so that you can download and view the  
programs you want.  
1. Press Applications  
2. Select Sprint TV  
and then navigate to the channel list you want as follows:  
To go back one channel screen, select Back.  
The Back option does not appear on the default channel screen.  
Note:  
To go back to the main channel list, select Home.  
3. To stream audio or video content, select a channel. The  
icon indicates audio content; the icon indicates video  
content. The icon indicates that the channel contains  
multiple content items. Select the channel to view all items.  
To view information about the selected channel or program, select Info.  
After you finish viewing the information, select Done.  
Note:  
4. (Optional) Select Stop  
or press Center  
to pause the server connection before  
again to resume streaming.  
streaming begins. Select Play  
or press Center  
From a channel or folder screen, you can also use the keyboard to enter a  
Tip:  
channel number, and then select OK to go to that channel.  
210  
Section 4C: Sprint TV  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Viewing Streamed Media  
Once you connect to the server, playback begins immediately. Use the following controls  
when viewing or listening to streaming media:  
Select  
to return to the channel list.  
Select  
or press Center to pause playback of nonlive  
content such as videos on demand.  
Select  
or press Center  
to stop playback of live content.  
Select  
or press Center  
to resume playback after pausing  
or to begin viewing again after stopping.  
Select  
Select  
or press Left to view the channel list with the first channel highlighted.  
or press Right to view the channel list with the last channel highlighted.  
A few seconds after playback begins, the toolbar is hidden and you can view the content  
on the full screen. Press Up  
again to hide the toolbar again.  
Press the Volume button on the side of your device to adjust the volume.  
or Down  
to display the toolbar; press Up  
or Down  
Section 4C: Sprint TV  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
211  
         
212  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5  
Your Mobile Organizer  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
214  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5A  
Using Your Device’s Organizer Features  
In This Section  
Section 5A: Organizer Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
215  
     
Contacts  
Contacts is where you enter information about people you know. You can access this  
information from the Phone application to dial phone numbers and create favorites, and  
from the Messaging and email applications to send messages. When you create a contact,  
you can also assign a caller ID picture or ringtone to that contact, so that you know when  
that person is calling.  
If you have several contacts to enter, it’s more efficient to use Palm® Desktop software or  
Microsoft® Outlook® on your computer and then synchronize information between your  
Palm Centro™ smart device and your computer. For more information, see “Synchronizing  
If you use Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync®, your contacts information  
(as well as email and calendar information) is moved directly between  
your company's Exchange server and your smart device using either  
Microsoft Direct Push technology or synchronization. Push is a feature  
provided by Microsoft ActiveSync that pushes email messages, Calendar  
events, meeting invitations, and updated contact information it receives  
onto your device. You retrieve contacts (and email and calendar) updates  
from the server; they are not updated when you synchronize directly  
with your computer. For additional information, see “Getting Messages  
page 138 (VersaMail® application users).  
Note:  
Adding a Contact  
1. Press Phone  
.
2. Select the Contacts favorite button.  
You can also open Contacts from Applications view.  
Tip:  
216  
Section 5A: Organizer Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
3. Select New Contact.  
4. Use the 5-way  
to move between fields as you enter  
information.  
5. (Optional) Do any of the following:  
Add a caller ID photo: Select the Picture box, and then do  
one of the following:  
Select Camera to take a picture and add it to this  
contact when you save the picture.  
Select Photos to add an existing picture to this  
contact.  
Add a caller ID ringtone: Select the Ringtone pick list and select a ringtone from  
the list to give incoming calls from this contact a distinctive ring.  
Place the entry in a category or mark it private: Select Details (see “Working With  
Private Entries” on page 293 for more information).  
Add a note to an entry: Select Note  
.
Display additional fields for this contact: Select Plus  
.
You can assign a ringtone to an entire category of contacts. For example,  
use a special ringtone for categories such as Family, Work, or Golf  
Buddies. Select the category pick list in the upper-right corner, select Edit  
Categories, and then select the category. Select a ringtone on the Edit  
Category screen.  
Tip:  
6. After you enter all the information, select Done.  
If you make an outgoing call or receive an incoming call that has caller ID  
Tip:  
and the phone number is not associated with a contact in your Contacts  
list, you can either create a new contact for that number or add the  
number to an existing contact. See “Saving Phone Numbers” on page 68  
for details.  
Section 5A: Organizer Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
217  
                 
Viewing or Changing Contact Information  
1. In the Contacts list, begin entering one of the following for the contact you want to  
view or edit:  
First name (JOH for John).  
Last name (SMI for Smith).  
First initial and last name (JSM for John Smith).  
2. Select the name of the entry you want to open.  
3. Select Edit, make changes to the entry as necessary, and then select Done.  
Viewing Directions to a Contact’s Address  
1. Make sure your phone is turned on and that you are inside a coverage area (see  
2. In the Contacts list, begin entering one of the following for the contact you want to  
view directions for:  
First name (JOH for John).  
Last name (SMI for Smith).  
First initial and last name (JSM for John Smith).  
3. Select the name of the entry you want.  
4. Select Map and wait for Google Maps to locate matching items.  
5. Select To or From depending on whether you want directions to or from the contact’s  
address.  
6. Do one of the following and then select OK:  
In the From location field, enter or select your starting location.  
In the To location field, enter or select your destination.  
7. When the route summary appears, select OK to view the first step in the directions.  
8. Tap the forward  
and back  
buttons at the bottom of the screen to view the  
next or previous step in the directions.  
218  
Section 5A: Organizer Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Deleting a Contact  
1. Open the contact you want to delete.  
2. Press Menu  
.
3. Select Delete Contact on the Record menu.  
4. Select OK.  
Defining Your Business Card  
1. Create a new contact with your own business card information.  
2. Open the contact entry containing your business information.  
3. Press Menu  
.
4. Select Select Business Card on the Record menu.  
After you define your business card, you can beam it to other Palm OS® by ACCESS devices.  
In Contacts or in any Phone view, press Menu  
and select Beam Business Card on the  
Record menu.  
Section 5A: Organizer Features  
219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Calendar  
Calendar is a full organizer application that helps you manage your schedule. You can view  
your calendar by day, week, or month, or as an agenda list that combines your list of tasks  
and email notifications with your appointments. Schedule repeating meetings or block out  
a vacation by creating one event set to repeat at an interval you specify. Color-code your  
appointments by category and add notes with helpful information.  
If you have several appointments to enter, it’s more efficient to use Palm Desktop software  
or MicrosoftOutlook on your computer and then synchronize information between the  
Centro device and your computer. For more information, see “Synchronizing Information—  
If you use Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync, your calendar information (as  
well as email and contacts information) is moved directly between your  
company's Exchange server and your smart device using either Microsoft  
Direct Push technology or synchronization. Push is a feature provided by  
Microsoft ActiveSync that pushes email messages, Calendar events,  
meeting invitations, and updated contact information it receives onto  
your device. You retrieve calendar (and email and contacts) updates from  
the server; they are not updated when you synchronize directly with  
your computer. For additional information, see “Getting Messages From  
page 138 (VersaMail users).  
Note:  
Displaying Your Calendar  
Press Calendar  
repeatedly to cycle through the various views:  
Agenda view shows your daily schedule and any items on  
your Tasks list that are overdue or due today. If there’s  
room, Agenda view also shows your schedule for the next  
dates that have events scheduled.  
220  
Section 5A: Organizer Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                               
Day view shows your daily schedule one day at a time.  
Week view shows your schedule for an entire week. The time frames are based on  
the Start Time and End Time settings in Calendar Preferences.  
Month view shows your schedule for a whole month.  
From any Calendar view, open the Options menu and select Year view to view a  
calendar for an entire year.  
From any Calendar view (except Agenda view), use the 5-way  
another day, week, month, or year (based on the current view).  
or stylus to move to  
From any Calendar view (except Agenda view), select Go To, and then select a date from  
the calendar.  
You can customize your phone to display the most current Calendar  
event on the Main view in the Phone application. Press Phone, open the  
Options menu, and then select Phone Display Options. Check the Show  
Calendar event box.  
Tip:  
Creating an Event  
1. Press Calendar  
until Day view appears.  
2. Press Left or Right to select the desired day.  
Selected Date  
Selected Day  
Section 5A: Organizer Features  
221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
3. Select New.  
4. Using the keyboard, enter a starting hour and minute for the event. (For example,  
enter 545 for 5:45.)  
5. Select the End Time box, and then select the ending hour and minute for the event.  
6. (Optional) To assign a time zone to the event, select the Time Zone pick list and select  
a city in the time zone you want.  
7. Select OK.  
8. Enter a description for the event.  
Time Zones and Events  
Here are some important points to keep in mind when assigning a time zone to an event:  
Palm Desktop software does not recognize time zones. If you sync with Palm Desktop  
software, you can add time zones to your events, but the start and end times do not  
change in Palm Desktop if you go to a different time zone.  
If you use Microsoft Outlook, you can use the time zone feature, but you must install  
the conduit that came with your Centro smart device by Palm (that is, you must install  
the desktop software from the Palm Software Installation CD and select to sync with  
Outlook) on all the computers you synchronize your device with. Chapura PocketMirror  
and other earlier Microsoft Outlook conduits do not support time zones.  
To automatically assign a time zone to your events, open the Options menu, select  
Preferences, and check the New events use time zones box. All your new events are  
assigned to your local time zone, and you can change this setting for individual events.  
In addition, if you sync with Outlook and you select the time zone option on the  
Calendar conduit sync screen, then time zones sync for any new events you create in  
Outlook. Time zone settings are not added to any events that you created before you set  
these time zone settings.  
222  
Section 5A: Organizer Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
If you want your events with time zones to stay at the same time in Calendar, regardless  
of the time zone you are in, go to Date & Time Preferences, select the Automatically set  
pick list, and then select either Nothing or Date & Time. If you select Date, time and  
time zone from the Automatically set pick list, the event time shifts if you travel to a  
Adding an Alarm to an Event  
1. In Calendar, select the event.  
2. Select Details.  
Numberof  
Time Units  
Type of Time Units  
3. Check the Alarm box, and then select the number of minutes, hours, or days before  
the event you would like to receive the alarm.  
page 224) is defined by minutes, days, or hours before midnight of the  
date of the event.  
Note:  
4. Select OK.  
When an alarm goes off, an alert is also displayed on the Alert screen. Select an alert’s  
description to jump to that item, or check the box to clear that alert. See “Viewing and  
Section 5A: Organizer Features  
223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Creating an Untimed Event  
An untimed event is an event that does not occur at a particular time of day—for example,  
a holiday or anniversary.  
1. Press Calendar  
until you are in Day view.  
2. Press Left or Right to go to the date of the event.  
3. Make sure that no times are highlighted.  
4. Enter a description for the event. A diamond appears next to  
the description of an untimed event.  
Scheduling a Repeating Event  
1. Create an event, and then select it.  
2. Select Details.  
3. Select the Repeat pick list, and then select a repeat interval. (If the interval you need  
doesn’t appear on the list, select Other to define a custom interval.)  
4. For weekly events, select the day(s) the event is repeated; for monthly events, select  
Day or Date to indicate the repeating method.  
5. If the event has an ending date, select the End on pick list, select Choose Date, and  
then select the ending date.  
6. Select OK.  
To enter a birthday or anniversary, add the information to the person’s  
Tip:  
Contacts entry and it automatically appears in your Calendar.  
224  
Section 5A: Organizer Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
This Icon  
Indicates a  
Repeating  
Event  
Color-Coding Your Schedule  
Use color-coding to quickly spot various types of events. For example, make your  
appointments with family green, co-workers blue, and friends red. Follow these steps to  
create a category and assign it a color code:  
1. From Day view, select the event description or select an empty time slot.  
2. Select Details.  
3. Select the Category pick list, and then select Edit Categories.  
4. Do one of the following:  
To create a new category, select New and then enter a category name.  
To add a color to an existing category, select a category and then select Edit.  
5. Select the color you want to give this category, and then select OK.  
6. (Optional) Repeat steps 4 and 5 to add or edit more categories.  
7. Select OK two more times.  
Now that the category is set up, you can assign a specific event to this category. See the  
next section for details.  
Section 5A: Organizer Features  
225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Editing or Deleting an Event  
To save memory, you can purge your old events. Open the Record menu  
Tip:  
and select Purge. Select the Delete Events Older Than pick list and select  
a time frame. Select OK.  
1. Select the event you want to edit or delete.  
2. Select Details.  
3. In addition to the settings covered earlier in this chapter, you can also change any of  
the following settings:  
Date and Time indicate when the event takes place. Change these settings to  
reschedule the event.  
Location provides space for you to enter a description of where the event takes  
place.  
Category sets the color-coded category for this event.  
Note  
provides space for you to enter additional text.  
Delete removes the event from your Calendar.  
4. Select OK.  
If you synchronize with Microsoft Outlook and your events include other  
people, a With field appears in the Details dialog box and your attendee  
information appears in this field after you synchronize.  
Tip:  
Customizing Display Options for Your Calendar  
1. Press Menu  
.
2. Select Options, and then select Display Options.  
3. Select the Default View pick list, and then select the view you want to see when you  
open Calendar.  
226  
Section 5A: Organizer Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                               
4. Select the Agenda box and set any of the following Agenda  
view options:  
Show Due Tasks displays tasks that are due today and  
tasks that are overdue.  
Show Messages displays the number of read and unread  
email messages.  
Background displays a favorite picture as the Agenda view  
background. Check the Background box, select the picture  
thumbnail, and then select a picture. Adjust the fade setting so that the text is  
easy to read against the picture.  
5. Select the Day box and set any of the following Day view  
options:  
Show Category List displays the category pick list.  
Show Time Bars activates the time bars that appear in Day  
view. The time bars show the duration of an event and  
illustrate event conflicts.  
Compress Day View controls how times appear in Day  
view. When Compress Day View is unchecked, all time slots  
are displayed on the screen. When it is checked, start and end times are displayed  
for each event, but blank time slots toward the bottom of the screen disappear to  
minimize scrolling.  
Show Category Column displays the color-coded category marker between the  
time and the description to indicate which category the event is filed under.  
Section 5A: Organizer Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
227  
                                             
6. Select the Month box and set any of the following Month view  
options:  
Show Category List displays the category pick list.  
Timed Events displays events that are scheduled for a  
specific time.  
Untimed Events displays events that are scheduled for a  
specific date but not a specific time.  
Daily Repeating Events displays events that are repeated  
every day.  
7. Select OK.  
Selecting Alarm Tones  
1. Press Menu  
.
2. Select Options, and then select Sound Preferences.  
3. Select the Application pick list, and then select Calendar.  
4. Select the Volume pick list, and then select the volume level.  
5. Select the Vibrate pick list, and then select how you want your device to vibrate for an  
event alarm.  
6. Select any of the following:  
Alarm Sound sets the tone played the first time your  
alarm goes off.  
Reminder Sound sets the tone played if an alarm is not  
acknowledged and the alarm repeats itself.  
Repeat indicates how many times the alarm repeats itself  
if it is not acknowledged.  
Default Alarm sets the default number of minutes, hours,  
or days before an event that the alarm goes off.  
7. Select Done.  
228  
Section 5A: Organizer Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                 
You can also preview, delete, and send sounds that you use as alarms.  
From the Sounds & Alerts Preferences screen, select Manage. To play a  
sound, select it and press Center on the 5-way. To delete a sound, select  
it and press Backspace, and to send a sound, select it and then select  
Send.  
Tip:  
Section 5A: Organizer Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
229  
 
Tasks  
You can use the Tasks application to keep track of tasks you need to complete and to keep a  
record of completed tasks.  
Adding a Task  
1. Press Applications  
and select Tasks  
.
2. Select New to create a new task.  
3. Enter a description of the task. (The text can be longer than  
one line.)  
Setting Task Priority, Due Date, and Other Details  
The Details dialog box enables you to assign a priority level, due date, category, privacy flag,  
and note to each task.  
1. Select the task to which you want to assign details.  
2. Select Details.  
3. Set any of the following:  
Priority sets the Priority number for this task (1 is the most important). You can  
arrange your tasks based on the importance of each task.  
Category assigns the task to a specific category.  
Due Date sets the due date for the task. Select the Due Date pick list and select a  
due date.  
Alarm sets an alarm for this task.  
Repeat indicates whether the task occurs at regular intervals and how often it  
repeats. When you check off a repeating task, the next instance of this task  
automatically appears in your task list.  
230  
Section 5A: Organizer Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Private indicates whether the task is private. Check this box to mark this task  
information.  
stores additional text you want to associate with the task.  
4. Select OK.  
You can also set the priority by selecting the Priority number next to a  
Tip:  
task in the Tasks list and then selecting a priority level from the list.  
Checking Off a Task  
Select the task you want to check off, and then press  
Center  
.
Organizing Your Tasks  
In the Tasks list, select one of these options:  
All displays all your tasks.  
Date displays tasks that are due in a specific time frame. You  
can select Due Today, Last 7 Days, Next 7 Days, or Past Due.  
Category displays tasks that are assigned to the selected category. Select the Category  
pick list to select a different category.  
Section 5A: Organizer Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
231  
               
Overdue tasks have an exclamation point (!) next to the due date.  
Tip:  
Deleting a Task  
1. Select the task you want to delete.  
2. Press Menu  
.
3. Select Delete Task on the Record menu.  
4. Select OK.  
To save memory, you can purge all completed tasks. Open the Record  
menu, select Purge, and then select OK.  
Tip:  
232  
Section 5A: Organizer Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Customizing Tasks  
The Tasks Preferences screen enables you to control the appearance of the Tasks list screen.  
1. In the Tasks list screen, press Menu  
.
2. Select Options, and then select Preferences.  
3. Set any of the following preferences:  
Sort by indicates the order in which your tasks appear in  
the list.  
Show Completed Tasks displays tasks that you’ve checked  
off.  
Record Completion Date replaces the due date with the  
completion date when you check off a task.  
Show Due Dates displays task due dates and inserts an  
exclamation point (!) next to overdue tasks.  
Show Priorities displays the priority setting for each task.  
Show Categories displays the category for each task.  
Alarm Sound sets the sound for the alarms you assign to your tasks.  
4. Select OK.  
Section 5A: Organizer Features  
233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Memos  
Memos are a great way to store notes on your Centro device.  
Each memo can include 4,096 characters of text.  
Creating a Memo  
1. Press Applications  
2. Enter the text that you want to appear in the memo. (Press  
Return to move down to new lines in the memo.)  
and select Memos  
.
3. Select Done.  
You can assign categories to your memos. Open the memo you want to  
change, select the category pick list at the top of the screen, and then  
select a category.  
Tip:  
Deleting a Memo  
1. Select the memo you want to delete.  
2. Press Menu  
.
3. Select Delete Memo on the Record menu.  
4. Select OK.  
234  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Section 5B  
Increasing Your Productivity  
In This Section  
Section 5B: Productivity  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
235  
   
Using the Documents Application to Work With Your  
Office Files  
With the Documents application, you can take your important office information with you.  
You can create, view, and edit Microsoft® Word and Excel® files directly on your device. You  
can also view and manage PowerPoint® and PDF files. For example, you can open email  
attachments, files you download with the Web browser, and files stored on an expansion  
card—as long as the files are in a supported format.  
The version of Documents To Go® that comes with your device does not  
support Microsoft Office 2007. To edit Office 2007 files on your device,  
you must save the files in Office 2003 format. For information about an  
upgrade that supports Office 2007, go to www.dataviz.com/office2007  
(additional fees may apply).  
Note:  
If you install the Documents To Go desktop software (from go.palm.com/centro-sprint/), you  
can use Documents To Go to transfer files to your device when you synchronize.  
For complete information on the Documents To Go application, install it  
from go.palm.com/centro-sprint/, click the Documents To Go icon on  
your computer, and then click Help; or go to www.dataviz.com.  
Note:  
Install the Palm® Files application to easily browse and manage files on  
an expansion card. Press Applications, select My Centro, select the Bonus  
tab, and then select Files.  
Tip:  
236  
Section 5B: Productivity  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
Here are a few more examples of what you can do with Documents:  
Send and receive email attachments in Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and Acrobat file  
formats (DOC, XLS, PPT, and PDF).  
View Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and Acrobat files (DOC, XLS, PPT, and PDF).  
Create or edit a Word-compatible document or Excel-compatible spreadsheet on your  
device, and then save it in the native DOC or XLS format.  
Create a PowerPoint presentation on your computer, use the Documents To Go desktop  
application to optimize the file for your device, and then sync the file onto your device.  
View or edit the file on your device, and then sync again to transfer the changes to the  
original PowerPoint file on your computer.  
The Documents application does not support some editing functions,  
Note:  
such as multiple font sizes and spell check.  
Opening a Document  
In the Documents application, you can open and view compatible  
Word, Excel, PowerPoint, or Acrobat (PDF) files on your device or on  
an expansion card that is inserted into the expansion card slot.  
1. Press Applications  
and select Documents  
.
2. Select the document you want from the list.  
When you are working on a file on your device, save it to your device or  
your expansion card by opening the menus, selecting Save As from the  
File menu, and then selecting the location where you want to save the  
file.  
Tip:  
Section 5B: Productivity  
237  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
Voice Memo  
Voice Memo provides a place for you to record and play back notes and other important  
thoughts directly on your device.  
Voice memos are not updated or backed up during synchronization.  
Note:  
Creating a Voice Memo  
1. Press and hold the Side button on your device. Face your device and begin speaking.  
Your recording pauses automatically when you receive a call. If you  
answer the call, recording stops and saves the voice memo. If you have  
not finished recording, rerecord your memo after hanging up from the  
call. If you ignore the call, select Record to resume recording.  
Note:  
2. After you finish recording, release the Side button. The memo is automatically saved  
to your device.  
3. (Optional) Enter a title for the memo.  
Alternately, open the Voice Memo application, press the Side button to  
begin recording, and then press it again when you have finished  
recording. If you are recording a long voice memo, you can begin  
recording by opening Voice Memo and selecting New. Using this  
method, you can press and hold Center on the 5-way to pause recording,  
and release Center to resume recording.  
Tip:  
238  
Section 5B: Productivity  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Listening to a Voice Memo  
1. Press Applications  
and select Voice Memo  
.
2. In the Voice Memo list, navigate to the voice memo title and  
then press Center  
to select it. The voice memo begins to  
play.  
3. To set the volume level, press the Volume button on the side  
of your device or press Up or Down on the 5-way  
to pause or stop playback.  
.
4. Press Center  
To change a voice memo title, open the Voice Memo menu and select  
Note:  
Rename Memo.  
You can send a voice memo in an email message (see Attaching Voice  
Memos” on page 131). You can also use Bluetooth® wireless technology  
to send a voice memo to a nearby Bluetooth device (see “Sending Entries  
Tip:  
You can also use a voice memo as a ringtone. Select a voice memo, press  
Menu, and select Copy to Ringtone from the Voice Memo menu. To  
Section 5B: Productivity  
239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
World Clock  
World Clock displays the day and time in three cities anywhere around the globe. Whether  
you’re traveling or staying at home, it’s easy to keep track of the best times to reach your  
business associates, friends, and family in faraway places.  
Setting Cities  
World Clock shows the system date and time above the world map. If you selected the  
option to get the date and time from the mobile network (see “Setting the Date and Time”  
on page 285), the Sprint National Network automatically updates the time display to  
match the local time when you travel.  
Below the world map you can view the time in two other cities. If  
you travel a lot, you may want to select your home city as one of  
these two cities, so that you always know what time it is at home.  
1. Press Applications  
and select World Clock  
.
2. Select a city pick list, and then select a city in the same  
time zone.  
Adding Cities  
If the city you want to display is not in the predefined list, you can add it.  
1. Select a city pick list, and then select Edit List.  
2. Select Add.  
3. Select a location in the same time zone as the city you want to add, and then select  
OK.  
4. Enter the name of the city.  
5. Select Location, select Map, select the location of the city, and then select OK.  
240  
Section 5B: Productivity  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
6. If the city is not on Daylight Saving Time, uncheck this box. If Daylight Saving Time is  
observed, enter Start and End dates.  
7. Select OK.  
Setting an Alarm  
The next time you travel, don’t rely on a hotel alarm clock to get you to that important  
meeting; use your device instead. World Clock includes a built-in alarm feature that you can  
use as a travel alarm.  
Make sure the Ringer switch is set to Sound On, so that you can hear the  
Tip:  
alarm.  
1. Select Off in the upper-right corner.  
2. Select the time you want the alarm to sound.  
3. Select OK.  
To customize the alarm sound and volume, open the Options menu and  
select Alarm Preferences.  
Tip:  
World Clock Tips  
Run your stylus over the map to see the time in other cities.  
The shadow over the map represents nighttime moving across the globe.  
Section 5B: Productivity  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
241  
   
Calculator  
The Calculator application includes a basic calculator, plus an advanced calculator with  
scientific, financial, and conversion functions  
Switching Between Basic and Advanced Calculator Modes  
1. Press Applications  
2. Press Menu  
3. Select Options, and then select Advanced Mode or Basic Mode.  
and select Calc  
.
.
Basic Mode  
Advanced Mode  
In Basic Mode, you can also press Right on the 5-way to switch to  
Advanced Mode. In Advanced Mode, press Right on the 5-way to cycle  
between functions, and press Left on the 5-way to return to Basic Mode.  
Tip:  
242  
Section 5B: Productivity  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Selecting Functions in Advanced Calculator Mode  
1. Switch to Advanced Calculator Mode (see the preceding procedure).  
2. Press Menu  
.
3. Select Options, and then select the function you want to use:  
Math provides advanced mathematical functions such as exponents, roots, and  
logarithms.  
Trig provides trigonometric functions such as sine, cosine, tangent, and variants.  
Finance provides financial calculator functions such as APR and amortization.  
Logic displays hexadecimal characters on the keypad, plus logic functions such as  
And, Not, Or, and Xor.  
Statistics provides statistical functions such as sum, factorial, and random  
number generator.  
Weight/Temp provides weight and temperature conversions for metric and  
English values.  
Length provides length conversions for metric and English values.  
Area provides area conversions for metric, traditional, and English values.  
Volume provides volume conversions for metric and English values.  
4. Press Menu  
.
5. Select Pref, and then select the decimal display format: Float, Fixed (x), Sci (x), or  
Eng (x).  
6. Press Menu  
.
7. Select Pref, and then select the number display format: Degrees, Radians, or Grads.  
To access a list of mathematical constants, such as Avogadro’s number or  
Tip:  
the speed of light, select Con.  
Section 5B: Productivity  
243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                   
Storing and Recalling Numbers in Advanced Mode  
To store a number in one of ten memory slots, select Sto.  
To recall a stored number, select Rcl.  
244  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Section 6  
Managing Your Information  
and Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
246  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 6A  
Managing Files and Applications  
In This Section  
Section 6A: Managing Files  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
247  
   
Using Find  
The Find feature locates any text in the built-in applications and databases and in some  
third-party applications. The Find feature searches for the group of characters you specify,  
including characters that are part of a word. Find is not case-sensitive, and it locates any  
word that begins with the text you enter. For example, entering plan finds planet but  
not airplane.  
When your phone is turned on and you are in an area where data services are available,  
Find also includes Google Maps links that help you find a location, business, or directions to  
the word you’re searching for. For example, to find a nearby pizza place, enter pizza  
followed by a space and your zip code, such as “pizza 95060.”  
1. On any screen, press Option  
+ Shift/Find  
to open the  
Find dialog box.  
2. Enter the text you want to find.  
3. Select OK to start the search.  
4. In the search results, select the text you want to review, or  
select Find More to continue the search.  
248  
Section 6A: Managing Files  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Installing Applications  
Your Palm Centro™ smart device comes with several built-in and ready-to-use applications.  
You can also install free bonus software applications, such as business software, games,  
and more. You can install the bonus software wirelessly using the My Centro application on  
your device or by downloading the bonus software from go.palm.com/centro-sprint/ to  
your computer and then synchronize to install it on your device. You can also use the Web  
browser on your device or your computer to purchase and install other third-party Palm  
OS® by ACCESS applications. To learn about applications you can purchase for your device,  
The instructions in this section tell you how to install basic PRC (Palm OS application) and  
PDB (Palm OS database) files on your Centro device. Some Palm OS software uses an  
installer or wizard to guide you through the process. For details, consult the documentation  
that came with the software.  
Installing Bonus Software From My Centro on Your Device  
My Centro lets you download and install bonus software that you can use on your device. If  
the bonus software has a desktop component in addition to a device component, you need  
to download the software to your computer first. See “Installing Bonus Software From My  
Palm on Your Computer” on page 250 for information on installing software that includes a  
desktop component.  
1. Press Applications  
and select My Centro  
2. Select the Bonus tab.  
3. Select the Install link below the name of the application you want to install.  
4. Repeat step 3 to install additional applications.  
Section 6A: Managing Files  
249  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
Didyouknow?  
You can also download and install Sprint-approved  
applications and utilities from the Sprint download site. Visit  
softwarestore.sprint.com for more information.  
Installing Applications From the Internet  
You can use the Web browser on your device to install Palm OS files (PRC or PDB) directly  
from the Internet. When you download a PRC or PDB file, it is automatically installed on  
your device. If a file is compressed (if it is a ZIP or SIT file), you need to download it to your  
computer and expand the file before installing it on your device.  
1. Open the Web browser (see “Viewing a Web Page” on page 158).  
2. Go to the page that contains the link to the application you want to download.  
3. Press Left or Right to highlight the link to the file, and then press Center  
to  
initiate the download process.  
4. Follow the onscreen instructions to accept and install the application.  
Installing Bonus Software From My Palm on Your Computer  
Some bonus software applications require the installation of a desktop component. To  
install these applications, you must first install Palm® Desktop software from the Palm  
Software Installation CD that came with your device, and then download the applications  
to your computer.  
1. On your computer, go to go.palm.com/centro-sprint/.  
2. Follow the onscreen instructions to download the applications you want to install.  
3. Synchronize your device with your computer to install the application(s) on your  
device.  
250  
Section 6A: Managing Files  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Installing Other Third-Party Applications From a Computer  
To install other third-party applications from a computer, you must first install  
Palm Desktop software from the Palm Software Installation CD that came with your device.  
When you download an application to your computer, it is probably in a compressed format  
such as a ZIP or SIT file. If the file is compressed, you need to use a decompression utility on  
your computer, such as WinZip or Allume StuffIt Expander, before you install the  
application on your device.  
1. On a Windows computer, select Start > Programs > Palm > Install Tool, and then select  
Add to browse to the application you want to add.  
On a Mac computer, drag and drop the application file(s) onto the Send To Handheld  
droplet in the Palm folder.  
2. Select your device name from the User list, and then click OK.  
3. Synchronize your device with your computer to install the application(s) on your  
device.  
Installing Third-Party Applications From a Computer to an Expansion Card  
You can install an application to an expansion card rather than to your device.  
Windows:  
1. Select Start > Programs > Palm > Install Tool.  
2. Select your device name from the User list.  
3. Select Add and browse to the application you want to add.  
4. Select Change Destination and select the expansion card.  
5. Select OK.  
6. Synchronize your device with your computer to install the application(s) on your  
device.  
Section 6A: Managing Files  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
251  
                     
Mac:  
1. In the menu for Palm Desktop software, click HotSync.  
2. Select Install Handheld files, and then select expansion card as the file’s destination.  
Getting Help With Third-Party Applications  
If you encounter a problem with a third-party application (such as an error message),  
contact the application’s author or vendor. For general troubleshooting of third-party  
252  
Section 6A: Managing Files  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Removing Applications  
If you decide that you no longer need an application or you want to free up memory, you  
can remove applications from your device or from an expansion card. You can remove only  
applications, patches, and extensions that you install; you cannot remove the built-in  
applications that reside in the ROM portion of your Centro device. These applications  
appear with a lock icon next to them.  
1. Press Applications  
.
2. If you want to remove an application from an expansion card, insert the card into your  
device.  
3. Press Menu  
.
4. Select Delete on the App menu.  
5. Select the Delete From pick list and select the location of the  
application you want to remove: Phone or Card.  
6. Select the application that you want to remove.  
7. Select Delete.  
8. Synchronize to remove the application from the Backup folder  
on your computer.  
Applications deleted from your device are kept on your computer in the  
Archive folder of your user folder. If you’re having trouble locating your  
Tip:  
Section 6A: Managing Files  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
253  
                       
Manually Deleting Applications From Your Computer  
If an application you delete reappears on your device, you may need to manually delete it  
from your computer.  
1. Locate your Backup folder on your computer.  
Windows: C:\Program Files\Palm\<Device Name>.  
Mac: Mac HD/Users/<User Name>/Documents/Palm/Users/<Device Name>.  
If you upgraded from a previous version of Palm Desktop, your Backup folder may  
be located in the palmOne or Handspring folder.  
2. If you find a PRC or PDB file for the application you just removed, delete the file from  
the Backup folder.  
3. Delete the file from your device again.  
254  
Section 6A: Managing Files  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Viewing Application Information  
The Info screens display basic statistics about the applications on your Centro device.  
1. Press Applications  
2. Press Menu  
.
.
3. Select Info on the App menu.  
4. At the bottom of the screen, select the type of information you  
want to view:  
Version displays the version numbers of your applications.  
Size displays the size (in kilobytes) of your applications and  
information.  
Records displays the number of entries in your  
applications.  
5. Scroll to the application you want to see information about.  
6. Select Done.  
Section 6A: Managing Files  
255  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
®
Sending Information Using Bluetooth Wireless Technology  
Sending Entries Over a Bluetooth Wireless Connection  
In most applications you can send an individual entry or item such as a contact or a picture.  
You can also send all the entries in a category, such as all contacts in the Business category.  
1. Press Applications  
and select Bluetooth  
.
2. Select Bluetooth On.  
3. Press Applications  
and open the application containing the information you  
want to send.  
4. Select the entry or category you want to send.  
5. Press Menu  
.
6. Select Send from the leftmost menu.  
7. Select Bluetooth, and then select OK.  
8. Select the receiving device(s) on the Discovery Results screen, and then select OK.  
Sending an Application Over a Bluetooth Wireless Connection  
1. Press Applications  
and select Bluetooth  
.
2. Select Bluetooth On.  
3. Press Applications  
.
4. Press Menu  
.
5. Select Send from the App menu.  
6. Select the Send From pick list and select whether the application you want to send is  
located on your device or on an expansion card.  
256  
Section 6A: Managing Files  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
7. Select the application you want to transfer. You cannot send an item that has a lock  
next to it.  
8. Select Send.  
9. Select Bluetooth, and then select OK.  
10. Select the receiving device(s) on the Discovery Results screen, and then select OK.  
Receiving Information Over a Bluetooth Wireless Connection  
1. Press Applications  
and select Bluetooth  
.
2. Select Bluetooth On.  
3. Select the Visibility pick list and select one of the following:  
Visible: Enables Bluetooth® devices that are not on your Trusted Device list to  
request a connection with your device. Your device remains accessible to other  
devices until you turn this option off.  
Temporary: Enables Bluetooth devices that are not on your Trusted Device list to  
request a connection with your device during the next two minutes. Your device  
reverts to the Hidden setting and becomes inaccessible to other devices after two  
minutes.  
4. Use the other device to discover your Centro device and send information to it:  
See the other device’s documentation to learn how to discover and send  
information over a Bluetooth wireless connection.  
If the Ringer switch is set to Sound On  
, your Centro device beeps to notify you  
of the connection and then prompts you to accept the information. Select a  
category or expansion card to file the item. If you don’t select a category, the item  
goes into the Unfiled category.  
5. Select Yes to receive the information or No to refuse it.  
Section 6A: Managing Files  
257  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
As a security measure, your Centro device does not accept any  
information unless you select Yes to receive the information. To protect  
your information, do not accept any information from an unknown  
sender.  
Tip:  
258  
Section 6A: Managing Files  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Beaming Information  
Your Centro device is equipped with an IR (infrared) port that enables you to beam  
information to another Palm OS® by ACCESS device with an IR port. The IR port is located  
on the side of your device, above the expansion card slot door, behind the small dark shield.  
IR Port  
For best results, the path between the two devices must be clear of obstacles and both  
devices must be kept stationary. If you have difficulty beaming, shorten the distance and  
avoid bright sunlight.  
If you beam a bookmark or a saved page from the Web browser, it beams  
the URL, not the contents of that page.  
Tip:  
Beaming an Entry  
You can beam an individual entry or item such as a contact or a picture. You can also beam  
all the entries in the selected category, such as all the contacts in the Business or Family  
category.  
1. Select the entry or category you want to beam. (You cannot beam an item that has a  
lock next to it.)  
2. Press Menu  
.
Section 6A: Managing Files  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
259  
             
3. Select one of the following on the Record menu:  
Beam sends an individual entry.  
Beam Category sends all entries in the current category.  
4. When the Beam Status dialog box appears, point the IR port on your Centro device  
directly at the IR port of the receiving device.  
5. Wait for the Beam Status dialog box to indicate that the transfer is complete before  
you continue using your Centro device.  
You can beam your business card. From the Main view in the Phone  
Tip:  
application, press Menu, and then press M.  
Beaming an Application  
Not all applications can be beamed. A lock icon appears on the Beam screen next to  
applications that cannot be beamed.  
1. Press Applications  
2. Press Menu  
3. Select Beam on the App menu.  
.
.
260  
Section 6A: Managing Files  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
4. Select the Beam From pick list and select whether the application you want to beam is  
located on your Centro device or on an expansion card.  
5. Select the application you want to transfer, and then select Beam.  
6. When the Beam Status dialog box appears, point the IR port on your Centro device  
directly at the IR port of the receiving device.  
7. Wait for the Beam Status dialog box to indicate that the transfer is complete before  
you continue using your Centro device.  
Please note that there may be restrictions that prevent you from  
transferring copies of an application to a third party. It is your  
responsibility to ensure that you have obtained the legal right to provide  
a copy to the third party and to honor any restrictions imposed by the  
software licensors.  
Note:  
Receiving Beamed Information  
1. Turn on your screen.  
2. Select the beam command on the transmitting device.  
3. Point the IR port on your Centro device directly at the IR port of the transmitting  
device to open the Beam Status dialog box.  
4. When the Beam Status dialog box appears, select a category or expansion card. (If you  
don’t select a category, the item goes into the Unfiled category.)  
5. Select Yes to receive the information or No to refuse it.  
Section 6A: Managing Files  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
261  
       
Synchronizing Information—Advanced  
Changing Which Applications Sync  
By default, information from Calendar, Contacts, Memos, Pics&Videos, and Tasks is updated  
each time you sync your device with Palm Desktop software or Microsoft Outlook. You can  
change which applications sync. For example, if you don’t use the Memos application and  
you want to speed up synchronization, you can turn off synchronization for Memos.  
Windows: If you set up your device to sync with Outlook®, see the  
online Outlook synchronization Help to learn how to change which  
applications synchronize. Click the HotSync® manager icon in the  
taskbar in the lower-right corner of your computer screen, and then  
select Custom to view the list of applications that sync with Outlook.  
Tip:  
On a Windows computer:  
1. Click the HotSync manager  
icon in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your  
screen.  
2. Select Custom.  
3. Select your device name from the drop-down list at the top of the screen.  
4. Select the application for which you want to turn synchronization on or off, and then  
click Change.  
5. Do one of the following:  
Select Synchronize the files to turn on synchronization for an application.  
Select Do nothing to turn off synchronization for an application that currently  
synchronizes (for example, to turn off synchronization for Memos if you do not  
use that application).  
262  
Section 6A: Managing Files  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Select one of the two overwrite options if you want the information in  
one location (device or computer) to completely replace the information  
in the other location for that application. For example, if the Calendar  
information on your device is accurate but the information on your  
computer has become corrupted, select Handheld overwrites desktop  
for the Calendar application to have your device information replace  
your computer information. Note that “handheld” refers to your device  
and “desktop” refers to your computer.  
Tip:  
6. (Optional) Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each application for which you want to turn  
synchronization on or off.  
7. (Optional) To keep this synchronization setting on an ongoing basis, check the Set as  
default box. If you do not check this box, the option you select applies only the next  
time you synchronize. Thereafter, information is updated according to the default  
setting for that application.  
8. Click OK, and then click Done.  
On a Mac computer:  
1. Double-click the Palm Desktop  
icon in the Palm folder.  
2. From the HotSync menu, select Conduit Settings.  
Section 6A: Managing Files  
263  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3. From the User pop-up menu, select your device name.  
4. Select the application for which you want to turn synchronization on or off, and then  
click Conduit Settings.  
5. Do one of the following:  
Select Synchronize the files to turn on synchronization for an application.  
Select Do nothing to turn off synchronization for an application that currently  
synchronizes (for example, to turn off synchronization for Memos if you do not  
use that application).  
Select one of the two overwrite options if you want the information in  
one location (device or computer) to completely replace the information  
in the other location for that application. For example, if the Calendar  
information on your device is accurate but the information on your  
computer has become corrupted, select Handheld overwrites Macintosh  
for the Calendar application to have your device information replace  
your computer information. Note that “handheld” refers to your device.  
Tip:  
6. (Optional) Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each application for which you want to turn  
synchronization on or off.  
264  
Section 6A: Managing Files  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. (Optional) To keep this synchronization setting on an ongoing basis, click Make  
Default. If you do not select this button, the option you select applies only the next  
time you synchronize. Thereafter, information is updated according to the default  
setting for the application.  
8. Click OK, and then close the Conduit Settings screen.  
Setting Up a Bluetooth Connection for Synchronization  
If your computer is enabled with Bluetooth wireless technology, you can synchronize  
wirelessly over a Bluetooth connection. When you synchronize using your device’s  
Bluetooth wireless feature, you don’t need your cable. This is especially useful if you travel  
with a laptop enabled with Bluetooth wireless technology.  
1. Press Applications  
and select Bluetooth  
.
2. Select On.  
3. Enter a device name for your Centro device. This is the name  
that appears on the other Bluetooth device’s screen when it  
connects to your Centro device.  
4. Select Setup Devices.  
5. Select HotSync Setup.  
6. Follow the onscreen instructions to create a partnership  
between your Centro device and your computer. In some cases  
you may need to perform setup steps on your computer before  
you can complete this step. Check your computer’s  
documentation for specific setup instructions.  
7. After you finish the HotSync Setup, select Done to return to  
Applications view.  
You’re now ready to sync your Centro device with your Bluetooth  
computer.  
Section 6A: Managing Files  
265  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Synchronizing Over a Bluetooth Connection  
1. Press Applications  
and select HotSync  
.
2. Select Local.  
3. Select the pick list below the HotSync icon, and then select  
the name of the PC you set up for Bluetooth synchronization  
4. Select the HotSync  
icon on your device.  
When synchronization is complete, a message appears at the top of your device screen. Be  
patient; synchronization may take a few minutes.  
Synchronizing Over an Infrared Connection  
When you synchronize using your device’s IR port, you don’t need your cable. This is  
especially useful if you travel with an IR-enabled laptop.  
To synchronize over an infrared connection, you must first do the following:  
Turn on your computer’s built-in IR port or external IR device. Check your computer’s  
documentation to see if the computer supports IR communication and to find out how  
to enable this feature.  
Make sure HotSync manager is active. On a Windows computer, you know HotSync  
manager is active when its icon  
appears in the lower-right corner of your screen.  
266  
Section 6A: Managing Files  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
On a Windows computer:  
1. On your computer, click the HotSync manager  
icon in the  
taskbar in the lower-right corner of your screen. Make sure  
that Infrared is selected.  
2. On your device, press Applications  
and select HotSync  
.
3. Select Local.  
4. Select the pick list below the HotSync icon and select IR to a  
PC/Handheld.  
5. Position the IR port of your device within a few inches or centimeters of the IR port of  
your computer.  
6. Select the HotSync  
icon on your device.  
When synchronization is complete, a message appears at the top of your device screen. Be  
patient; synchronization may take a few minutes.  
On a Mac computer:  
1. Double-click the HotSync manager  
icon in the Palm folder.  
2. From the HotSync Controls tab, select Enabled.  
3. Click the Connection Settings tab, and then check the On box next to IR port.  
4. Close the HotSync Software Setup screen.  
5. On your device, press Applications  
and select HotSync  
.
6. Select Local.  
7. Select the pick list below the HotSync icon, and select IR to a PC/Handheld.  
8. Position the IR port of your device within a few inches or centimeters of the IR port of  
your computer.  
Section 6A: Managing Files  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
267  
   
9. Select the HotSync  
icon on your device.  
When synchronization is complete, a message appears at the top of your device screen. Be  
patient; synchronization may take a few minutes.  
If you use Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync®, your email, contacts, and  
calendar information synchronize directly with your company’s  
Exchange server. This information synchronizes wirelessly with the  
server; it is not updated when you synchronize directly with your  
continue to synchronize with Palm Desktop software or Microsoft  
Outlook, depending on which desktop application you use.  
Note:  
268  
Section 6A: Managing Files  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Expansion Cards  
The expansion card slot on your Centro device enables you to add microSD cards (sold  
separately) to extend the storage capacity of your device. For example, microSD cards can  
store the following:  
Pictures  
MP3 audio files  
Email attachments  
Games  
Microsoft Office files  
Adobe Acrobat files  
Applications  
Databases  
Your Centro device is compatible with microSD cards with up to 4GB of  
storage space.  
Note:  
Inserting an Expansion Card  
1. Gently press down on the Battery Door, and then slide the door downward to remove  
it from your device.  
2. Open the door of the expansion card slot.  
3. Hold your device with the screen facing you, and hold  
the card with the label down and the metal contacts  
facing up. (The notch on the card should be in the  
lower-left corner next to the keyboard.)  
4. Insert the card into the expansion card slot until you  
feel the card lock into place.  
Notch  
Section 6A: Managing Files  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
269  
           
5. Close the door of the expansion card slot.  
6. Replace the battery door.  
Removing an Expansion Card  
1. Gently press down on the Battery Door, and then slide the door downward to remove  
it from your device.  
2. Open the door of the expansion card slot.  
3. Press the card into the expansion card slot to release it from the slot.  
4. After you feel the expansion card slot eject the card, remove it from the slot.  
5. Close the door of the expansion card slot.  
6. Replace the battery door.  
Your device has a push-push mechanism: push in gently to insert a card;  
push in gently to remove it. If the Ringer switch is set to Sound On, you  
hear a confirmation tone when you insert or remove an expansion card.  
Tip:  
Opening Applications on an Expansion Card  
After you insert an expansion card into the expansion card slot, you  
can open any of the applications stored on the expansion card.  
1. Insert the expansion card into the expansion card slot.  
(Applications view automatically appears.)  
2. Select the icon for the application you want to open.  
3. Press Center  
to open the application.  
270  
Section 6A: Managing Files  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Accessing Items Stored on an Expansion Card  
When an expansion card contains items such as pictures or songs, you can access those  
items directly from the card.  
1. Insert the expansion card into the expansion card slot. (Applications view  
automatically appears.)  
2. Select the category pick list in the title bar, and then select All.  
3. Select the icon for the application in which you want to open the item. For example,  
to view a picture, select Pics&Videos.  
Install the Palm® Files application to easily browse and manage files on  
an expansion card. Press Applications, select My Centro, select the Bonus  
tab, and then select Files.  
Tip:  
Copying Applications Between an Expansion Card and Your Device  
You can copy applications between your Centro device and your expansion card.  
Before you copy an application to an expansion card, make sure that it is  
compatible with Palm OS software version 5.4.5 or later. Some  
applications do not work with expansion cards and do not allow you to  
store files in a location that is separate from the application.  
Tip:  
1. Make sure the card is not write-protected. (For details, see the instructions that came  
with your card.)  
2. Press Applications  
3. Press Menu  
.
.
Section 6A: Managing Files  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
271  
       
4. Select Copy on the App menu.  
5. Select the Copy To pick list and select the destination: <card  
name> or Phone.  
6. Select the From pick list and select the location of the  
application you want to copy: <card name> or Phone.  
7. Highlight the application you want to copy.  
8. Select Copy.  
You can install an application directly to an expansion card instead of  
Tip:  
copying it from your device’s main memory. See “Installing Applications”  
on page 249 for details.  
Viewing Expansion Card Information  
The Card Info application displays general information about the  
expansion card that is currently in the expansion card slot, and it  
enables you to rename and format a card.  
Press Applications  
and select Card Info  
.
Renaming an Expansion Card  
If you change the contents of an expansion card, you may at some  
point want to rename the card to better match its contents.  
1. Make sure the card is not write-protected. (For details, see the instructions that came  
with your card.)  
2. Insert the expansion card into the expansion card slot. Applications view  
automatically appears.  
3. Select the category pick list at the top of the screen, and then select All.  
4. Select Card Info  
.
272  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
5. Press Menu  
.
6. Select Rename Card on the Card menu.  
7. Enter a new name for the card.  
8. Select Rename.  
Formatting an Expansion Card  
Formatting an expansion card is similar to formatting a disk on a computer. When you  
format an expansion card, you erase all the information stored on the card and return it to  
a blank state.  
1. Make sure the card is not write-protected. (For details, see the instructions that came  
with your card.)  
2. Insert the card into the expansion card slot. Applications view automatically appears.  
3. Select the category pick list at the top of the screen, and then select All.  
4. Select Card Info  
5. Press Menu  
.
.
6. Select Format Card on the Card menu.  
7. Select OK.  
Section 6A: Managing Files  
273  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
274  
Section 6A: Managing Files  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting System Sounds  
Silencing Sounds  
You can immediately silence all alerts, ringtones, music that plays through the built-in  
speaker, and system sounds by sliding the Ringer switch to Sound Off  
. This does not,  
however, mute the audio during a phone call.  
1. Slide the Ringer switch to Sound Off  
. (Your device vibrates once to let you know  
that you’ve turned sounds off.)  
2. To hear all sounds again, slide the Ringer switch to Sound On  
.
When you slide the Ringer switch back to Sound On  
, it restores the previous sound  
settings.  
Sound On  
Sound Off  
Your device includes a silent alarm that can vibrate even when the  
Ringer switch is set to Sound Off. For information on setting the vibrate  
option, see the section on setting alert tones in the chapters that  
describe the individual applications.  
Tip:  
276  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Setting System Volume Levels  
You can set the volume level for system sounds, such as the tone that plays when you  
synchronize.  
If the Ringer switch is set to Sound Off, the ringer setting overrides the  
Tip:  
sound settings and all sounds are turned off.  
1. Press Applications  
and select Sounds  
.
2. Select the Application pick list, and then select System.  
3. Select the System Volume and Game Volume pick lists, and  
then select the volume levels.  
4. Select Done.  
277  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Adjusting the Display and Appearance  
Adjusting the Brightness  
Depending on the lighting conditions in which you’re using your device, you may need to  
adjust the brightness of the screen and keyboard backlight.  
1. Press Option , and then press Backlight  
.
Backlight  
2. Press Left and Right to adjust the brightness.  
3. Select Done.  
To automatically set the brightness to the low setting, press Option, and  
Tip:  
then press Menu.  
Changing the Screen Font  
You can change the screen font in Calendar, Contacts, Memos, Sprint Picture Mail, Tasks,  
and the Web browser. The font styles may vary between applications, and some  
applications may offer fewer choices.  
278  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
1. Open the application in which you want to  
Small  
Bold  
Small  
Large  
Large  
Bold  
change the font.  
2. Press Menu  
.
3. Select Options, and then select Font.  
4. Select a font style. (In the Web browser, select  
the Font size pick list and select Large or Small.)  
5. Select OK.  
You can also change the text size in the VersaMail® application. See the  
User Guide for the VersaMail Application located on your Palm Software  
Installation CD, or visit go.palm.com/centro-sprint/ for more  
information.  
Tip:  
Setting Display Formats  
Formats Preferences enable you to select number conventions based on geographic  
regions. For example, in the United Kingdom, time often is expressed using a 24-hour clock.  
In the United States, time is expressed using a 12-hour clock with an AM or PM suffix. Many  
of the built-in applications on your Palm Centro™ smart device use the Formats Preferences  
settings.  
1. Press Applications  
and select Prefs  
.
2. Select Formats.  
3. Set any of the following preferences:  
Preset to sets the standard number conventions for your  
country. When you select a country, the other Formats  
Preferences are automatically set to that country’s  
conventions. You can also edit each option individually.  
Time sets the time format. Select HH:MM to display a 24-hour clock.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
279  
                 
Date sets the date format.  
Week starts sets the first day of the week (usually Sunday or Monday).  
Numbers sets the format for numbers with decimal points and commas.  
4. Select Done.  
Aligning the Screen  
Occasionally, your device screen may need to be readjusted. If this  
occurs, you may see the wrong feature being activated when you  
tap the screen. To fix the problem, you can realign the screen any  
time.  
1. Press Applications  
and select Prefs  
.
2. Select Touchscreen.  
3. Follow the onscreen instructions to tap the screen where  
indicated.  
4. Select Done.  
Changing the System Color Scheme  
1. Press Applications  
and select Prefs  
.
2. Select Color Theme.  
3. Select a color scheme from the list.  
4. Select Done.  
You can also set the wallpaper for the Main view in the Phone  
on page 85) and the background for Agenda view in Calendar (see  
Tip:  
280  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Changing the Applications Settings  
You can change the Applications settings on your device so that you can easily access the  
applications you use most often. You can arrange and display your applications by category,  
reassign the buttons on your device, and select default applications for specific tasks.  
Arranging Applications by Category  
You can assign an application to a category and then display a specific category of  
applications in Applications view.  
1. Press Applications  
2. Press Menu  
.
.
3. Select Category on the App menu.  
4. Select the pick list next to each application and select a category.  
5. Select Done.  
To create a new category, select the category pick list and select Edit  
Categories. Select New, and then enter the category name. Select OK to  
close the dialog box, and then select OK again.  
Tip:  
Displaying Applications by Category  
Do one of the following:  
Press Applications  
repeatedly to cycle through all your categories.  
Select the category pick list at the top of the screen and select the category you want to  
display. Select All to display all your applications.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
281  
                 
Selecting the Applications Display  
By default, Applications view displays each application as an icon. As an alternative, you  
can view a list of applications. The list view is particularly useful when you have so many  
applications in a category that the applications fill up more than one screen.  
1. Press Applications  
2. Press Menu  
.
.
3. Select Options, and then select Preferences.  
4. Select the View By pick list, and then select List.  
5. Select OK.  
282  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Customizing Device Buttons  
Reassigning Buttons  
With Buttons Preferences you can select which applications are associated with the quick  
buttons and the Side button on your device. You can assign a primary and secondary  
application to each of the three quick buttons that open an application.  
We recommend that you keep the primary button assignments on the  
factory settings until you become comfortable with the features of your  
device. If you do change the primary button assignments, remember  
that the instructions in this guide and in the other help features refer to  
the original button settings.  
Tip:  
1. Press Applications  
2. Select Buttons.  
and select Prefs  
.
3. Do any of the following:  
Select the pick list next to the icon of the button you want  
to reassign, and then select an application  
Select the pick list next to the Option + Button  
combination you want to reassign, and then select an  
application.  
Select the Press + Hold Side button pick list, and then select an application.  
4. Select Done.  
You can also select HotSync to choose an application to open with the  
sync button on the sync cable. To restore all the buttons and key  
combinations to their factory settings, select Default.  
Tip:  
283  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Changing Default Applications  
Sometimes one application looks for another application to handle information (for  
example, a mail application might open a browser when you select a link in an email  
message). Your device comes with a set of predefined applications to handle email,  
messaging, and browser requests from other applications. If you have more than one  
application to handle these requests on your device, you can specify which application you  
want to use for each function.  
1. Press Applications  
and select Prefs  
.
2. Select Default apps.  
3. Select each pick list, and then select the application you want  
to associate with that function.  
4. Select Done.  
284  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Setting the Date and Time  
By default, your device synchronizes the date, time, and time zone with the Sprint National  
Network when your device is on and you are inside a coverage area. Date & Time  
Preferences let you manually set the date, time, and time zone for your device.  
You can also add time zones to events you create in Calendar. See  
Note:  
1. Press Applications  
and select Prefs  
.
2. Select Date & Time.  
3. Select the Automatically set pick list and select one of the  
following settings:  
Nothing acquires no information from the Sprint network.  
You must set the date, time, and time zone yourself.  
Date & time acquires the date and time from the Sprint  
network. You must set the time zone yourself.  
Date, time, and time zone: The date, time, and time zone are acquired from the  
Sprint network. You cannot change any of the settings.  
The options that appear on the screen in the remaining steps vary based  
on the setting you selected in this step.  
Note:  
4. If the Location pick list appears, select it and then select a city in your time zone.  
If you don’t see a city in your time zone, select Edit List, select Add, select  
a city in your time zone, and then select OK. If necessary, modify any of  
the settings in the Edit Location dialog box, and then select OK.  
Note:  
285  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
5. If the Date and Time fields appear, select the Date field and select the date, and then  
select the Time field and select the time.  
6. Select Done.  
286  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Optimizing Power Settings  
Power Preferences enable you to adjust settings to maximize your device’s battery  
performance.  
1. Press Applications  
and select Prefs  
.
2. Select Power.  
3. Set any of the following preferences:  
Brightness: Sets the intensity of the screen and keyboard  
backlights. Drag the slider or press Left and Right to  
adjust the brightness level.  
Auto-off after: Determines how long your screen stays on  
during a period of inactivity. When there is no interaction  
with the keyboard or screen for the specified time period,  
your screen turns off automatically.  
Backlight during calls: To preserve power during an active  
call, you can set the screen backlight either to dim or turn off after a specified  
amount of time. Turning off the backlight saves more power than dimming it.  
With the backlight turned off, you can still see a faint image on the screen and use  
any of the buttons on the screen. To return backlight brightness to normal, press  
any key or tap the screen. Be careful; pressing Power/End hangs up an active call,  
and tapping an onscreen button activates that command.  
Beam Receive: Determines whether your Centro device is ready to receive  
information over an infrared beam. If you leave this option off, you must return to  
this screen to turn on this option the next time you want to receive beamed  
information.  
4. Select Done.  
287  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Locking Your Device and Information  
Your Centro device includes several features that help protect your device from inadvertent  
use and keep your information private. You can lock any of the following features on your  
device:  
Keyboard (Keyguard): You can use the Keyguard feature to disable the keyboard and all  
buttons in case they are accidentally pressed in your bag or pocket.  
Screen: You can disable the screen’s touch-sensitive feature during an active call or call  
alert.  
Phone (Phone Lock): You can use the Phone Lock features to set your phone to require a  
password before a call is made. The built-in security software lets you call emergency  
services even if your phone is locked.  
Device: You can set your device to require a password for you to see any information on  
the device.  
Entries: You can mask or hide entries marked as private and set your device to require a  
password for viewing them.  
Locking Your Keyboard (Keyguard)  
The Keyguard feature locks the keyboard so buttons aren’t accidentally pressed or items on  
the screen aren’t activated while your device is in a pocket or bag.  
By default, Keyguard turns on whenever the screen is off. Each time you wake up the  
screen, you must turn off Keyguard to unlock the keyboard and use your device.  
288  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
To turn off Keyguard, do the following:  
1. If the screen is off, press Power/End to wake up the screen.  
2. Press Center  
to turn off Keyguard. (To turn on Keyguard,  
press Option  
and then press Power/End .)  
You can change how quickly Keyguard turns on, or you can disable  
the feature altogether. To change the Keyguard settings, do the  
following:  
1. Press Applications  
and select Prefs  
.
2. Select Keyguard.  
3. Select the Auto-Keyguard pick list, and then do one of the following:  
Select how quickly you want Keyguard to turn on: When power is turned off,  
5 seconds after power off, or 30 seconds after power off.  
Select Disabled to completely disable the Keyguard feature until you turn it  
on again.  
4. Select Done.  
If you disabled Keyguard, you can turn Keyguard on manually by  
pressing Option + Power/End when the screen is on. If you use this  
method, Keyguard stays on only until you press Center to turn it off; it  
does not come back on. To permanently reenable Keyguard, follow the  
preceding procedure and select one of the options from the  
Auto-Keyguard list.  
Note:  
289  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Locking Your Screen  
You can set your device to automatically lock the screen’s touch-sensitive features in  
certain situations.  
1. Press Applications  
and select Prefs  
.
2. Select Keyguard.  
3. Check one or both of the following boxes:  
Incoming calls received: Disables the screen when the phone rings. You must use  
the 5-way to select the onscreen Answer and Ignore buttons, or press Talk  
to answer the call or Power/End to ignore the call.  
On a call: Disables the screen after you answer a call. You must use the 5-way  
to select the onscreen buttons during the call. Use this setting to avoid  
accidentally pressing onscreen buttons while you’re holding your device near your  
ear to speak.  
4. Select Done.  
Locking Your Phone (Phone Lock)  
You can lock your phone to prevent unauthorized calls and use of other wireless features.  
When your phone is locked, you must enter the correct code to unlock it. You can still call  
emergency services when your phone is locked, however.  
1. Press Phone  
.
2. Press Menu  
.
3. Select Options, and then select Phone Lock.  
4. (Optional) Select Advanced, enter up to three numbers that you can dial when your  
phone is locked, and then select OK. You do not need to enter 911 as one of the three  
numbers, because this number is always available.  
290  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
5. Select one of the following Phone Lock options:  
On phone power off locks your phone each time you turn it off. When this setting  
is active, you must enter your lock code each time you turn your phone on again.  
Immediately locks your phone when you select OK. The next time you dial a  
number, you must enter your lock code to unlock your phone. After that, you can  
continue to make calls without entering your lock code, unless you select one of  
the phone lock options.  
6. When prompted, enter the lock code, and then select OK. (Unless you changed your  
lock code, it is the last four digits of your phone number.)  
7. If you want to change the lock code, select Change Lock Code, enter a new lock code,  
and then select OK. Repeat this step to verify the new lock code.  
8. Select OK. If you selected Immediately in step 5, your phone locks right away. If you  
selected On phone power off, your phone locks the next time you press and hold  
Power/End  
to turn off your phone.  
To disable the current Phone Lock settings:  
1. Press Phone  
.
2. Press Menu  
.
3. Select Options, and then select Phone Lock.  
4. Uncheck the On phone power off box and enter your lock code to change this setting.  
5. Select OK twice.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
291  
   
Locking Your Device  
To protect your personal information, you can lock the device so that you need to enter your  
password to access any of your information or use any features of your device, including  
the phone. You can still call emergency services when your device is locked.  
If you lock your device, you must enter the exact password to unlock it. If  
you forget the password, you need to perform a hard reset to resume  
using your device (see “Hard Reset” on page 305). Performing a hard  
reset deletes all the entries in your device. However, you can restore all  
previously synchronized information the next time you synchronize your  
Important:  
1. Press Applications  
and select Security  
.
2. Select the Password box.  
3. Assign a password and a password hint.  
4. Select the Auto Lock Device box.  
5. When prompted, enter your password, and then select OK.  
6. Select one of the following options:  
Never prevents your device from locking automatically.  
You can still lock your system manually by selecting Lock  
& Turn Off and then selecting Off & Lock.  
On power off locks your device when you turn off the  
screen, or when it shuts off with the Auto-off feature.  
At a preset time locks your device at a specific time of day.  
After a preset delay locks your device after a period of  
inactivity.  
7. Select OK.  
292  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
8. Do one of the following:  
Select Lock & Turn Off to lock your device immediately.  
Press Applications to accept your settings and continue using your device.  
Working With Private Entries  
In most applications, you can mark individual entries as private. All private entries remain  
visible and accessible until you select the Security setting. You have two Security setting  
options:  
Hide Records prevents private entries from appearing anywhere in the application.  
Mask Records replaces private entries with a visual placeholder where the entry would  
normally appear.  
After you enable the mask or hide settings, any entries marked as private are immediately  
hidden or masked. If you define a password, you must enter it to display private entries. If  
you do not define a password, you (or anyone else) can reveal private entries without a  
password.  
1. Display the entry that you want to mark private.  
2. Select Details.  
3. Check the Private box.  
4. Select OK.  
Hiding or Masking All Private Entries  
1. Make sure the entries you want to hide or mask are marked private, as described in  
the preceding procedure.  
2. Press Applications  
and select Security  
.
3. Select the Current Privacy pick list, and then select either Hide Records or Mask  
Records.  
4. If prompted for your password, enter it and select OK.  
293  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Viewing All Private Entries  
You can reveal all of the entries you’ve hidden or masked.  
1. Press Applications  
and select Security  
.
2. Select the Current Privacy pick list, and then select Show Records.  
3. If prompted for your password, enter it and then select OK.  
Viewing Private Entries in a Specific Application  
1. Open the application that contains the private entries you want to see.  
2. Press Menu  
.
3. Select Options, and then select Security.  
4. Select the Current Privacy pick list, and then select Show Records.  
5. Select OK.  
6. If prompted for your password, enter it and then select OK.  
Security and Palm® Desktop Software (Windows)  
The Windows version of Palm® Desktop software observes the security password for your  
Centro device. If you forget your password, you cannot view your information in  
Palm Desktop software. If your device is unlocked, you can change your password on your  
device, but all entries marked as private are deleted. You can restore your private entries the  
next time you sync.  
Follow these steps to recover a lost password:  
1. Press Applications  
and select Security  
.
2. Select the Password box.  
3. Select the Lost Password box.  
4. Select Yes.  
294  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
Entering Owner Information  
You can use Owner Preferences to record information that you want to associate with your  
Centro device, such as your name, company name, and home phone number. If you lock  
your device (see “Locking Your Device” on page 292), the Owner Preferences information  
appears on the screen that requests your password to unlock it, and you must also enter  
your password to change the Owner Preferences information.  
1. Press Applications  
and select Prefs  
.
2. Select Owner.  
3. If you assigned a password with the Security application,  
select Unlock, enter your password, and then select OK.  
4. Enter the text that you want to appear on the Owner  
Preferences screen.  
5. Select Done.  
295  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Using Connection Settings  
Connecting to a Virtual Private Network  
If you want to use your Centro device to access your corporate email account or other files  
on your corporate server, you may need to set up a virtual private network (VPN) on your  
device. A VPN enables you to log in to your corporate server through the company’s firewall  
(security layer). You need a VPN on your device if your device and your company’s server are  
located on opposite sides of the firewall.  
Check with your company’s system administrator to see if a VPN is required for accessing  
the corporate server. If a VPN is necessary, you must purchase and install a third-party VPN  
client on your device to use this feature.  
For information about third-party VPN client software, visit  
Note:  
1. Install your third-party VPN client. See “Installing Applications” on page 249 for  
details.  
2. Press Applications  
and select Prefs  
.
3. Select VPN.  
4. Enter the settings provided by your corporate system administrator.  
296  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Purchasing Accessories for Your Device  
These and other accessories are available from your local Sprint Store or at  
go.palm.com/centro-sprint/. For more information, you can also dial #222 and press TALK on  
your smart device. Wait for the prompt, press 3, and then press 2 to order accessories. You can  
also visit www.sprint.com. Next-day delivery is available in select areas.  
Vehicle Power Charger  
Charges your device in your vehicle using the car lighter socket.  
Replacement Battery  
Serves as a backup battery if your primary battery becomes drained, is charging, or has  
reached the end of its useful life.  
USB Sync Cable  
Provides an extra cable (your device comes with one USB sync cable).  
USB Docking Cradle  
Provides a convenient and elegant desktop solution for synchronizing information,  
charging your device with any USB-enabled PC or Mac computer, and charging a second  
battery.  
Extra AC Charger  
Provides an extra 100–240 volt AC charger for your device.  
International Travel Adapters  
Provides snap-on adapters for continental Europe, the United Kingdom, and Australia.  
For use with the Extra AC Charger only.  
Leather Side Case With Belt Clip  
Clips to your belt or bag for quick access and protection for your device.  
Stylus  
Provides a replacement or spare stylus for your device.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
297  
         
298  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7  
Resources  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
300  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 7A  
Help  
In This Section  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
301  
   
Trouble Upgrading?  
If you experience problems with your Palm Centro™ smart device after performing the  
page 29, you may have incompatible applications or settings that were not quarantined  
during the installation process. These files reside in the Backup subfolder of your user  
folder. Incompatible applications or settings can lead to numerous issues, including system  
resets and freezes. If you experience problems after upgrading, follow these steps to  
correct the problem:  
1. Locate your user folder on your computer:  
Windows: If your device name is one word, your user folder name is the first six  
characters of your device name. If your device name is two words, your user folder  
name consists of the first six characters of the second word of your device name,  
followed by the first letter of the first word. For example, if your device name is  
John Smith, your user folder is named SmithJ. Your user folder is usually located  
inside one of the following folders:  
C:\Program Files\Palm\  
C:\Program Files\palmOne\  
C:\Program Files\Handspring\  
Mac: Your user folder name is the same as your device name and is usually found  
in this location:  
<Mac hard drive> : Users : <Your Mac username> : Documents: Palm : Users.  
2. Make a copy of your user folder and store it in a safe place.  
Windows: Copy the folder, and then paste it to your Windows desktop.  
Mac: Select the folder, press and hold the Option key, and then drag the folder to  
your Mac desktop.  
3. Confirm that the copy of your user folder includes a subfolder named Backup, and  
that all the files in the original Backup subfolder are also in the copy of the Backup  
subfolder.  
302  
Section 7A: Help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4. Delete all files from the original Backup subfolder.  
on page 304 for instructions.  
6. Sync your Centro smart device by Palm with your new desktop software; be sure to  
select your existing device name from the User list.  
7. Reinstall third-party applications from the copy of your Backup subfolder (see  
“Installing Applications” on page 249 for instructions). We recommend that you  
install one application at a time to help you identify the application that caused the  
problem. We also recommend that you do not install any applications that do any of  
the following:  
Modify phone functions, such as ringtones, dialing, or caller ID.  
Replace organizer applications, such as Contacts or Calendar.  
Set data connection features, such as activating or ending data connections.  
Provide Web-clipping applications or files, such as PQA files.  
Provide instant messaging features.  
If you want to continue using these types of applications, please contact the third-party  
developer for software updates and information about compatibility with your  
Centro smart device by Palm.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
303  
   
Resetting Your Palm Centro™ Smart Device  
Soft Reset  
Performing a soft reset is similar to restarting a computer. If your Centro device is not  
responding or you’re having trouble synchronizing with your computer, a soft reset may  
help. All your information is retained when you perform a soft reset.  
1. Remove the battery from your device, and then reinsert it. (See “Replacing the  
The reset begins when you insert the battery and ends when the  
Note:  
Date & Time Preferences screen appears.  
2. Select Done.  
System Reset  
A system reset, also called a safe or warm reset, can be useful if your device loops or freezes  
during a soft reset. Performing a system reset allows you to get out of the loop and restores  
limited functionality to your device in order to uninstall a third-party application that’s  
causing the problem. Note that after a system reset, you must perform a soft reset to  
restore full functionality, including the wireless features, to your device.  
1. Remove the battery from your device.  
2. Press and hold Up  
3. When Date & Time Preferences appears, release Up  
on the 5-way  
while reinserting the battery. (See “Replacing  
.
4. Delete the third-party application that you suspect is causing the problem.  
5. Perform a soft reset. (The wireless features of your device are not available until you  
complete this step.)  
304  
Section 7A: Help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Hard Reset  
A hard reset erases all information and third-party software on your Centro device. Never  
perform a hard reset without first trying a soft reset and a system reset. You can restore  
previously synchronized information the next time you synchronize.  
Your device might not reestablish a Sprint Power Vision session after a  
hard reset. To manually establish a new Sprint Power Vision session,  
open the Web browser to access a Web site.  
Note:  
A hard reset can tell you if a problem stems from your Centro device or from an application  
installed on it. If you do not experience the problem after you perform a hard reset, the  
suggestions on diagnosing third-party software issues.  
If you set a password on your device, performing a hard reset reformats  
your device (the message “Reformatting in progress” is displayed). This is  
a more severe form of a hard reset, which removes all your information  
and restores your formats, preferences, and other settings to the factory  
default settings.  
Important:  
Some third-party applications do not create a backup on your computer  
when you synchronize. If you perform a hard reset, you may lose data in  
these applications and you need to reinstall these applications after the  
hard reset. Please contact the developer to find out which information is  
backed up during synchronization.  
Note:  
305  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
1. Remove the battery from your device.  
2. Press and hold Power/End while  
reinserting the battery. (See “Replacing the  
3. When the second Palm® logo appears,  
release Power/End  
4. When the “Erase all data?” prompt appears,  
press Up to confirm the hard reset.  
.
5. If a “Reformatting in progress” message appears, do not touch your device until the  
process is complete. This may take up to ten minutes.  
6. Follow the onscreen instructions to align the screen and set the date and time.  
7. (Optional) If you want to confirm that the hard reset was successful, press  
Applications  
and select HotSync  
. (If you see your device name in the  
upper-right corner, the hard reset was not successful. If you do not see your device  
name, the reset was successful.)  
8. Sync to restore any previously synchronized information.  
306  
Section 7A: Help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Replacing the Battery  
Your Centro device comes with a replaceable battery. Be sure to use a battery that is  
approved by Sprint and that is compatible with your device. Failure to use the proper  
battery may result in personal injury or product damage, and it voids your device warranty.  
1. Press Power/End  
to turn off the screen.  
2. Gently press down on the Battery Door, and then slide the door downward to remove  
it from your device.  
3. Place a finger in the notch next to the battery and lift the battery up at a 45-degree  
angle to remove it from the compartment.  
4. Align the metal contacts on the new battery with the contacts inside the battery  
compartment.  
Battery  
Contacts  
Battery Door  
Device  
Contacts  
Notch  
5. Insert the new battery into the compartment at a 45-degree angle, pressing it into  
place. Slide the battery door onto the back of the device until it clicks into place.  
6. Connect your device to the charger or sync cable.  
7. Wait for your device to turn on, and then enable the network time or set the date and  
time when prompted.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
307  
   
Be sure to dispose of your old battery properly. In some areas, disposal in  
household or business trash is prohibited.  
Note:  
Use only Sprint-approved or Palm-approved batteries and chargers with  
your phone. The failure to use a Sprint-approved or Palm-approved  
battery and charger may increase the risk that your phone will overheat,  
catch fire, or explode, resulting in serious bodily injury, death, or property  
damage.  
WARNING:  
Do not handle a damaged or leaking Li-ion battery, or you risk being  
burned.  
WARNING:  
Note:  
Your Centro smart device may not run when attempting to use a battery  
that is not Palm-approved.  
308  
Section 7A: Help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Desktop Software Installation  
If you are having trouble installing the desktop software, you may have the wrong version  
of the software or some of your computer’s resources may be unavailable. Follow these  
steps to retry the installation:  
The Palm Software Installation CD installs software that enables you to  
synchronize using Palm® Desktop software or Microsoft® Outlook® for  
Windows. If you want to synchronize using a different personal  
information manager (PIM), you must install a third-party solution.  
Contact the PIM’s author or vendor to learn whether desktop software  
is available for your new Centro device.  
Note:  
1. Make sure your computer profile includes administrator rights to install software.  
In large organizations, these are usually granted by the system administrator.  
2. Restart your computer.  
3. Quit any active applications, including virus scanners and Internet security  
applications.  
4. Make sure you’re installing the software from the Palm Software Installation CD that  
came with your new Centro smart device by Palm. (Other versions of the desktop  
software may not work with this device.)  
5. Insert the Palm Software Installation CD to restart the installation.  
Always use the same language for your Centro device, your operating  
system, and your desktop software. Otherwise, you may lose  
information or have difficulty with synchronization. Support is not  
provided for mismatched language setups.  
Important:  
309  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Screen  
The Screen Appears Blank  
1. When a call lasts longer than the limit specified in Power Preferences, the screen dims  
automatically. In certain lighting conditions, the screen may appear blank when this  
occurs. Press any key except Power/End to restore the screen to normal brightness.  
(Pressing Power/End  
hangs up the call.)  
2. When a period of inactivity lasts longer than the limit specified in Power Preferences,  
the screen turns off. When you are not on a call, press and release Power/End to  
wake up the screen. When you are on a call, press any key except Power/End to  
wake up the screen.  
3. Look closely at the screen. If you can see a dim image, try adjusting the screen  
4. If the screen is still blank, perform a soft reset (see “Soft Reset” on page 304).  
5. If the problem persists, connect the Centro device to the AC charger (see “Charging  
the Battery” on page 15) and perform a soft reset again.  
6. If that doesn’t work, perform a hard reset (see “Hard Reset” on page 305).  
The Screen Doesn’t Respond Accurately to Taps or It Activates Wrong Features  
1. Press Applications  
and use the 5-way  
to select Prefs  
.
2. Use the 5-way  
to select Touchscreen.  
3. Follow the onscreen instructions to align the screen.  
4. Select Done.  
5. If the problem persists, check for material trapped between the screen and the edge  
of the device.  
6. If you’re using a screen protector, make sure that it is properly installed.  
310  
Section 7A: Help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
There’s a Blinking Bell at the Upper-Left Corner of the Screen  
The blinking bell  
in the upper-left corner of the screen is the Alert Manager symbol. It  
appears when you have alarms or messages that you haven't acknowledged.  
1. Press and hold Center  
or tap the Alert Manager symbol  
with your stylus.  
2. When the list of pending alerts appears, do either of the following:  
Select the alert text to view the item and keep it in the list.  
Check the box next to an alert to clear it from the list, and then select Done.  
Synchronization  
Synchronization backs up the information from your device onto your computer and vice  
versa. If you ever need to perform a hard reset or otherwise need to erase all your  
information on your device, you can synchronize your device with your computer to restore  
the information. Similarly, if your computer crashes and your Palm Desktop software  
information is damaged, you can recover your information by synchronizing with your  
device. To make sure you always have an up-to-date backup of your information,  
synchronize frequently.  
This section describes synchronization between your Centro device and a desktop  
computer running Palm Desktop software. You can also synchronize the information on  
your device using third-party applications. See the separate documentation for other  
applications for information on features and configuration.  
Before you attempt to synchronize, make sure you’ve installed the desktop synchronization  
software from the Palm Software Installation CD.  
I Can’t Find My User Folder  
Windows: If your device name is one word, your user folder name is the first six characters  
of your device name. If your device name is two words, your user folder name consists of  
the first six characters of the second word of your device name, followed by the first letter  
of the first word. For example, if your device name is John Smith, your user folder is named  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
311  
                     
SmithJ. Your user folder is usually located inside one of the following folders:  
C:\Program Files\Palm\  
C:\Program Files\palmOne\  
C:\Program Files\Handspring\  
Mac: Your user folder name is the same as your device name and is usually found in this  
location: <Mac hard drive> : Users : <Your Mac username> : Documents : Palm : Users.  
Palm® Desktop Software Does Not Respond to a Synchronization Attempt  
1. Make sure that the USB sync cable is securely connected to the USB port on your  
computer and on the bottom of your device (see “Connecting Your  
2. Make sure that HotSync® manager is running:  
Windows: Right-click the HotSync manager  
icon in the taskbar in the  
lower-right corner of your computer screen and make sure Local USB is checked. If  
you don’t see the HotSync manager  
icon, click Start, select Programs, select  
Palm, and then select HotSync Manager.  
Mac: Find the Palm folder on your Mac hard drive. Double-click the HotSync  
manager icon in the Palm folder. In the Connection Settings panel, set Local  
Setup Port to Palm USB.  
3. Synchronize. If the synchronization is successful, you do not need to complete the  
remaining steps.  
5. Synchronize. If the synchronization is successful, you do not need to complete the  
remaining steps.  
312  
Section 7A: Help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
6. If problems persist and you’re synchronizing through a USB hub, try connecting the  
sync cable to a different USB port, or directly to your computer’s built-in USB port.  
7. Synchronize. If the synchronization is successful, you do not need to complete the  
remaining steps.  
8. (Windows only) Uninstall Palm Desktop software. Click Start, select Settings, select  
Control Panel, select Add or Remove Programs, select Palm Desktop software, and  
then click Change/Remove.  
Palm Desktop software for Mac computers does not provide an  
automated uninstall option. For information on uninstalling  
Palm Desktop software on a Mac, go to go.palm.com/centro-sprint/ or  
contact Palm Technical Support for Mac computers.  
Note:  
9. Reboot your computer.  
10. Reinstall the synchronization software from the Palm Software Installation CD that  
came with your device.  
Synchronization Starts But Stops Without Finishing  
If you upgraded from a previous Palm OS® by ACCESS device or received a system error, such  
as Sys0505, there may be conflicts with software on your device.  
1. Locate your Backup folder and rename the folder (for example, BackupOld). Note that  
“Palm” in the following locations might be “Handspring” or “palmOne,” based on the  
device you’re upgrading from:  
Windows: C:\Program Files\Palm\<device name>  
Mac: Mac HD\Applications\Palm\Users\<device name>  
2. Synchronize.  
3. Manually reinstall any third-party applications you want on your device. If necessary,  
use the items in the old Backup folder you renamed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
313  
       
4. (Windows only) If the Windows New Hardware Wizard appears, the synchronization  
process may be timing out before the wizard completes its job. Follow all instructions  
in the New Hardware Wizard, and then sync again.  
5. (Windows only) Uninstall Palm Desktop software. Click Start, select Settings, select  
Control Panel, select Add or Remove Programs, select Palm Desktop software, and  
then click Change/Remove.  
Palm Desktop software for Mac computers does not provide an  
automated uninstall option. For information on uninstalling  
Palm Desktop software on a Mac, go to go.palm.com/centro-sprint/ or  
contact Palm Technical Support for Mac computers.  
Note:  
6. Reboot your computer.  
7. Reinstall the synchronization software from the Palm Software Installation CD that  
came with your device.  
The HotSync Log can tell you when and why synchronization stopped.  
Right-click the HotSync manager icon in the taskbar in the lower-right  
corner of your computer screen, and then select View Log.  
Tip:  
Synchronization Finishes But Information Does Not Appear Where It Should  
1. Make sure you’re synchronizing with the intended desktop personal information  
manager (PIM). The Palm Software Installation CD enables you to choose whether to  
synchronize with Palm Desktop software or Microsoft Outlook for Windows. Reinsert  
the installation CD and select Change your sync method if necessary. If you use a  
different PIM, you need to install third-party software to synchronize. For more  
information, consult the company that makes the PIM.  
2. If multiple Palm OS devices are synchronizing with your computer, make sure you are  
synchronizing with the correct device name. If information is not appearing in  
Palm Desktop software, make sure the correct device name is selected in the User list  
on the toolbar of Palm Desktop software.  
314  
Section 7A: Help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
3. Open HotSync manager on your computer, and make sure the necessary conduits are  
set to Synchronize the files.  
4. (Windows only) Uninstall Palm Desktop software. Click Start, select Settings, select  
Control Panel, select Add or Remove Programs, select Palm Desktop software, and  
then click Change/Remove.  
Palm Desktop software for Mac computers does not provide an  
automated uninstall option. For information on uninstalling  
Palm Desktop software on a Mac, go to go.palm.com/centro-sprint/ or  
contact Palm Technical Support for Mac computers.  
Note:  
5. Reboot your computer.  
6. Reinstall Palm Desktop software from the Palm Software Installation CD that came  
with your device.  
7. If you’re using Microsoft Outlook, consider the following:  
With the included software, you can synchronize your Centro device with the  
Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, and Notes folders on your computer. If you want to  
synchronize your information with a global Exchange Address Book, you must  
copy the addresses to your local Contacts list in Outlook (right-click the addresses,  
and then select Add to Personal Address Book).  
Outlook subfolders and public folders are not accessible with the included  
software. You may want to use a third-party solution instead.  
If you’re trying to synchronize offline, be sure to set your Outlook Calendar,  
Contacts, Notes, and Tasks to be available offline.  
For more information on Outlook conduits, click the HotSync manager  
icon in the taskbar, select Custom, select an application with Outlook in  
its name, and then select Help.  
Tip:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
315  
   
I Have Duplicate Entries in Microsoft® Outlook® After I Synchronize  
1. Open Microsoft Outlook and delete the duplicate entries.  
2. On your computer, go to the application with duplicate entries and manually enter  
any information you’ve added to your device since the last time you synchronized.  
3. Click the HotSync manager  
icon in the taskbar, and select Custom.  
4. Select an application that has duplicate entries that also has Outlook in its name.  
5. Click Change.  
6. Select Desktop overwrites handheld, and then click OK.  
7. If more than one application has duplicate entries, repeat steps 4 through 6 for each  
application with duplicates.  
8. Click Done.  
9. Synchronize your device and your computer.  
My Appointments Show Up in the Wrong Time Slot After I Sync  
If you create an appointment in the wrong time zone (for example, your desktop was set to  
the wrong time zone), it shows up in the wrong time zone on your device after you sync. To  
be safe, enable local network time (see “Setting the Date and Time” on page 285) and avoid  
assigning time zones to your appointments (see “Creating an Event” on page 221).  
If you’re using Microsoft Outlook:  
1. Make sure that you installed the Microsoft Outlook conduit that came with your  
Centro smart device by Palm. If you're not sure whether this software is installed,  
reinstall it.  
2. Open Microsoft Outlook and correct the wrong entries.  
3. On your computer, manually enter any Calendar information you added to your  
device since the last time you synchronized.  
4. Click the HotSync manager  
icon in the taskbar, and select Custom.  
5. Select an application that has both Calendar and Outlook in its name.  
316  
Section 7A: Help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
6. Click Change.  
7. Select Desktop overwrites handheld, and then click OK.  
8. Synchronize your device and your computer.  
9. Repeat steps 6 through 8 to open the Calendar Change HotSync Action dialog box.  
10. Select Synchronize the files, and then click OK.  
If you’re using Palm Desktop software:  
1. On your device, press Calendar  
2. Press Menu  
.
.
3. Select Options, and then select Preferences.  
4. Uncheck the New events use time zones box (if it's checked).  
5. On your computer, open Palm Desktop software and correct the wrong entries.  
6. On your computer, manually enter any Calendar information you added to your  
device since the last time you synchronized.  
7. Click the HotSync manager  
icon in the taskbar, and select Custom.  
8. Select an application that has both Calendar and Outlook in its name.  
9. Click Change.  
10. Select Desktop overwrites handheld, and then click OK.  
11. Synchronize your device and your computer.  
12. Repeat steps 7 through 9 to open the Calendar Change HotSync Action dialog box.  
13. Select Synchronize the files, and then click OK.  
To avoid this problem in the future, do not assign time zones to your events. Palm Desktop  
software does not support time zones.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
317  
     
Phone  
Signal Strength Is Weak  
Become familiar with low coverage areas where you live, commute, work, and play. Then  
you know when to expect signal-strength issues.  
If you’re standing, move about 10 feet (3 meters) in any direction.  
In a building, move near a window. Open any metal blinds.  
In a building, move outdoors or to a more open area.  
Outdoors, move away from large buildings, trees, or electrical wires.  
In a vehicle, move your device so that it’s level with a window.  
My Palm Centro Smart Device Won’t Connect to the Mobile Network  
Try the suggestions in the preceding section for weak signals.  
Turn off your phone and turn it on again (see “Turning Your Device’s Phone On and Off”  
Perform a soft reset (see “Soft Reset” on page 304).  
If you have an active DUN session (that is, you are using your device’s phone as a  
The Other Person Hears an Echo  
Try decreasing the volume on your device to avoid coupling or feedback on the other  
person’s end. This applies to both the speakerphone and the earpiece.  
Position the earpiece closer to your ear to prevent sound leaking back into the  
microphone. Keep your hand away from the microphone hole, which is on the bottom  
right side of the phone.  
If you’re using the speakerphone feature with your device lying on a flat surface, try  
turning the device face down (screen facing the surface).  
318  
Section 7A: Help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
I Hear My Own Voice Echo  
Ask the person on the other end of the call to turn down the volume on his or her phone or  
to hold the phone closer to his or her ear.  
My Voice Is Too Quiet on the Other End  
Be sure to position the bottom of the Centro smart device, or the hands-free  
microphone, close to your mouth.  
Check the signal-strength indicator. If the signal is weak, try to find an area with better  
coverage.  
I Hear Static or Interference  
Check the signal-strength indicator. If the signal is weak, try to find an area with better  
coverage.  
If you’re using a hands-free device enabled with Bluetooth® wireless technology, try the  
following:  
Move your Centro device closer to the hands-free device. Audio quality degrades as the  
distance between your Centro device and the hands-free device increases. The effective  
range for a hands-free device varies among manufacturers.  
Confirm that no obstructions, including your body, are between the Centro device and  
your hands-free device. For example, move your Centro device to the same side of your  
body as your hands-free device.  
My Device Hangs Up When I Hold It to My Ear  
You may be accidentally pressing the onscreen Hang Up All button with your cheek. Try  
holding the device so that your face doesn’t press against the screen. If this is not  
convenient, you may want to disable the screen’s touch-sensitive feature during active calls  
My Device Seems to Turn Off by Itself  
If a system error and reset occur, the Centro device automatically turns the phone on if it  
was on before the reset. However, if the device can’t determine if your phone was on before  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
319  
               
the reset, the phone does not automatically turn on (see “Turning Your Device’s Phone On  
and Off” on page 55). If the problem persists and you’re using third-party applications, see  
My Device Makes or Answers Calls When It’s in a Bag or Pocket  
Items in your bag or pocket may be pressing the onscreen Answer button or otherwise  
activating screen items. If this happens, be sure to press Power/End  
to turn off the  
screen before placing it in your briefcase or pocket. You may also want to disable the  
screen’s touch-sensitive feature during incoming calls (see “Locking Your Screen” on  
If you are using a Bluetooth hands-free device with your Centro device, you may have  
turned the auto-answer feature on in Handsfree Preferences. For information, see  
Hands-Free Devices  
I Can’t Make or Receive Calls Using a Bluetooth® Hands-Free Device  
Confirm all of the following:  
The device with Bluetooth wireless technology is compatible with your Centro device.  
Go to go.palm.com/centro-sprint/ for a list of compatible devices.  
Press Applications  
turned on in the Bluetooth application.  
and select Bluetooth  
. Make sure the Bluetooth setting is  
You have already formed a partnership between your Centro device and your  
hands-free device, and the hands-free device appears in the Trusted Devices list (see  
Your hands-free device is charged and turned on.  
Your Centro device is within range of the hands-free device.  
320  
Section 7A: Help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Bluetooth range is up to 30 feet (10 meters) in optimum environmental  
conditions. Performance and range can be affected by physical obstacles,  
radio interference from nearby electronic equipment, and other factors.  
Note:  
I Hear Static or Interference When Using My Hands-Free Device  
Try moving your Centro device closer to the hands-free device. Audio quality degrades  
as the distance between your Centro device and hands-free device increases. The  
effective range for a hands-free device varies among manufacturers.  
Confirm that no obstructions, including your body, are between the Centro device and  
your hands-free device.  
Some Features of My Hands-Free Device Don’t Work With My Palm Centro Smart Device  
Check the Palm compatibility list at go.palm.com/centro-sprint/ to ensure that your  
device is compatible.  
Not all hands-free features work with every hands-free device. Check the  
documentation that came with your hands-free device or the manufacturer’s Web site  
for feature-compatibility information specific to your device.  
Email  
The following troubleshooting tips apply to the VersaMail® application  
only. If you are using Sprint Mobile EmailSM as your email application,  
refer to the documentation included with that application for  
troubleshooting tips.  
Note:  
I Have Problems Using My Account  
Occasionally you may experience problems using an email account after you set it up. If you  
followed the account setup procedure and are experiencing problems using the account,  
verify that the account complies with your email provider’s requirements by following  
these steps:  
Verify both your password and your username for your email account.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
321  
             
Some wireless service providers require you to be on their network to use your email  
account. If this is the case, be sure to use your provider's network as the connection  
type for the account.  
Some email service providers have other requirements specific to their service. For  
example, Yahoo! requires you to pay for a POP account in order to download email  
messages from your Yahoo! account to your device. Check with your service provider to  
see if any provider-specific requirements exist.  
Service provider settings change frequently. If your email account was working but you  
are currently experiencing problems, check with your wireless or email service provider  
to see if any of the account settings have changed.  
I Have Problems Sending and Receiving Email  
Short periods of time when email is unavailable are common due to server problems or  
poor wireless coverage. If you have problems sending or receiving mail for an extended  
period of time, check with your ISP or email service provider to verify that the service is  
working properly, and check with Sprint Customer Service for outage information in your  
area.  
Microsoft Direct Push or Auto Sync Is Not Working  
If push or an Auto Sync operation is occurring and you turn your device’s phone off or the  
connection to your email service provider is disconnected, the push or Auto Sync operation  
fails. If Microsoft Direct Push or a scheduled Auto Sync doesn’t take place or starts but does  
not finish, make sure your device’s phone is on and that your data connection to your mail  
server or email service provider has not been interrupted.  
I Have Problems Sending Email  
If you are able to receive email messages but cannot send them, try these steps, in turn:  
Make sure your ISP or email provider allows you to access email on a wireless device.  
Several providers, like Hotmail, do not offer this option at all; other providers require an  
upgrade to access email on a wireless device.  
322  
Section 7A: Help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Turn on ESMTP. Many services require authenticated access, or ESMTP, to use their SMTP  
servers. See the User Guide for the VersaMail Application located on your Palm Software  
Installation CD, or visit go.palm.com/centro-sprint/ for information on turning ESMTP  
on.  
Enter the name of a different outgoing mail server for sending mail. Many ISPs, such as  
cable companies, require that you have an Internet connection to their network to send  
email through their servers. In this case, you can almost always receive email from  
these accounts, but if you want to send email, you must send it through another server.  
Check with your email service provider for the correct outgoing mail server name.  
I Have Problems Synchronizing Messages on My Device With Messages on My Computer  
Make sure you have chosen the same settings for the account on both your device and your  
computer. For example, if the account is set up on your device to use the POP protocol,  
check HotSync manager on your computer to make sure that POP is selected as the protocol  
for that account.  
My vCard or vCal Email Attachment Isn’t Forwarding Correctly  
Palm Desktop software provides several features that work with email client software on a  
Windows computer. For these features to work correctly, the email client software must be  
properly set up. Follow these steps to check the settings:  
1. Click Start on your computer, and then select Settings.  
2. Select Control Panel.  
3. Select Internet Options, and then click the Programs tab.  
4. Make sure that the email field is set to the correct email client software.  
5. Click OK.  
6. Start the email client software and make sure it is configured as the default MAPI  
client. (Consult the documentation for your desktop email application for more  
information.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
323  
               
After I Get Messages, Either Manually or Through Auto Sync, Messages Disappear From My Inbox  
If you have an account that uses Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync®, when Microsoft Direct  
Push takes place or you perform an Auto Sync, the last three days’ worth of email messages  
are downloaded from your mail server to your Inbox. All messages older than three days are  
deleted from your Inbox; they are not deleted on the server, however.  
You can change the setting in VersaMail preferences to download fewer than three days’  
worth of messages (in which case, more-recent messages are deleted from your Inbox), or  
to download all messages regardless of the date (in which case all messages continue to  
appear in your Inbox).  
I Am Using Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync®, But Email Messages, Calendar Events, and Contacts  
Information Are Not Downloading to My Device  
Check with your system administrator to obtain the name of the mail server that offers you  
wireless access to the corporate mail system. If you cannot obtain the name of this server  
(some companies do not give it out, because they do not want wireless access to their  
servers), Microsoft Direct Push or wireless synchronization of email messages, Calendar  
events, and Contacts information using Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync cannot take place.  
Messaging  
I Can’t Tell If Data Services Are Available  
When your phone is on, icons appear in the title bar in the Main view of the Phone  
application to indicate whether data services are available and whether a data connection  
the icons that indicate that data services are available.  
If your phone is on and you do not see any of the data icons, then data services are not  
available in your current location.  
324  
Section 7A: Help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
I Can’t Send or Receive SMS Text Messages  
Make sure your phone is turned on (see “Turning Your Device’s Phone On and Off” on  
Contact Sprint to verify that your plan includes SMS messaging services, that these  
services have been correctly activated, and that they are available at your location.  
Sprint should be able to tell you if messaging services have been experiencing  
transmission delays. Delays can also occur between the time that a message is sent and  
the time it is received.  
Verify with the recipient that the receiving device can handle text messages.  
If a text message arrives but does not display an alert, perform a soft reset (see “Soft  
I Can’t Send or Receive Sprint Picture Mail Messages  
Make sure your phone is turned on (see “Turning Your Device’s Phone On and Off” on  
Contact Sprint to verify that your plan includes Sprint Picture Mail messaging services,  
that these services have been correctly activated, and that they are available at your  
location. Sprint should be able to tell you if messaging services have been experiencing  
transmission delays. Delays can also occur between the time that a message is sent and  
the time it is received.  
When your phone is on, icons appear in the title bar in the Main view of the Phone  
application to indicate whether data services are available and whether a data  
description of the icons that indicate that data services are available.  
Verify with the recipient that the receiving device can handle Picture Mail messages.  
If you have an active DUN session (that is, you are using your device’s phone as a  
If a Picture Mail message arrives but does not display an alert, perform a soft reset (see  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
325  
     
Web  
I Can’t Tell If Data Services Are Available  
When your phone is on, icons appear in the title bar in the Main view of the Phone  
application to indicate whether data services are available and whether a data connection  
the icons that indicate that data services are available.  
If your phone is on and you do not see any of the data icons, then data services are not  
available in your current location.  
The Device Won’t Connect to the Internet  
Your Centro smart device by Palm supports Sprint Power Vision, a connection method that  
is persistent and is faster and more reliable than a regular dial-up connection. All Sprint  
customers can connect to the Internet, but to avoid high per-minute charges, we  
recommend that you subscribe to a Sprint Power Vision plan. Contact Sprint to verify that  
your subscription plan includes Sprint Power Vision services and that these services have  
been correctly activated, and to confirm your username and password. Sprint should also  
be able to tell you if there are any outages in your area.  
1. Press and hold Power/End to turn off your phone. Then press and hold Power/End  
again to turn your phone back on.  
2. Press Phone  
and look for either the Sprint Power Vision  
or the icon, or the  
Sprint 1xRTT data  
icon in the title bar of the Main view. See “Checking Signal  
Strength and Phone Status” on page 96 for a description of the icons that indicate  
that data services are available.  
3. If you see one of those icons, you are in a data coverage area. Try connecting to the  
Internet again. If you do not see one of those icons, press Applications  
Prefs , and continue with the following steps.  
, select  
326  
Section 7A: Help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
4. Select Network.  
5. Select the Service pick list and select Power Vision. (If Power Vision does not appear in  
the list, call Sprint for assistance.)  
6. Select Connect.  
7. If the connection is successful, go to the Web browser. If you still can’t make a  
connection, perform a soft reset (see “Soft Reset” on page 304).  
8. If your phone did not turn on automatically, press and hold Power/End to turn on  
your phone, and try connecting to the Internet.  
9. Contact Sprint to verify the following:  
Your subscription plan includes high-speed data services.  
Data services have been activated on your account.  
Data coverage is available in your location.  
There are no data service outages in your location.  
I Can’t Access a Web Page  
First, make sure you have Internet access. Open the Web browser to see if you can view a  
Web page you’ve successfully viewed before. To ensure that you’re viewing the page  
directly from the Internet, press Menu  
, select Go, and then select Refresh.  
If you can view the page after you refresh it but you still can’t access the page you were  
originally trying to view, the page may contain elements that are not supported by the Web  
browser. These include Flash, Shockwave, VBScript, WMLScript, and other plug-ins.  
Some Web sites use a redirector to their true home page. If the Web browser on your device  
can’t follow the redirect, try using a desktop browser to see the landing page of the  
redirector, and then enter that address in the Web browser on your device.  
It Takes a Long Time for a Web Page to Load  
If it is taking longer than usual to load Web pages, you may have traveled from a  
high-speed Sprint Power Vision service area to a Sprint 1xRTT service area. Although Sprint  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
327  
   
1xRTT data service is considered a high-speed data service, it can seem slow if you are used  
to Sprint Power Vision speed.  
1. Press Phone  
and look for the Sprint Power Vision  
or icon or the Sprint  
1xRTT data  
icon in the title bar of the Main view. See “Checking Signal Strength  
and Phone Status” on page 96 for a description of the icons that indicate that data  
services are available.  
2. If you see the Sprint Power Vision  
or icon, there may be a problem with the Web  
site you are trying to access. Try opening a different Web page to see if the problem  
persists.  
3. If you see the Sprint 1xRTT data  
icon, you may be experiencing the difference in  
performance between the two types of data networks.  
4. To be sure there is not a problem with your connection to the Sprint network, press  
and hold Power/End  
to turn off your phone. Then press and hold the same button  
to turn it back on again.  
5. Try opening the Web page again to see if it loads faster.  
An Image or Map Is Displayed Too Small on the Device Screen  
The Web browser has two modes: Optimized and Wide Page. Optimized mode resizes all  
images and page elements to make them fit in a single vertical column on the  
Centro device screen. Switch to Wide Page mode to see the image in its original, full-size  
You may also be able to save the image to your device or to an expansion card and then  
view the image later on your computer (see “Downloading Files From a Web Page” on  
page 161 for information).  
A Secure Site Refuses to Permit a Transaction  
Some Web sites don’t support certain browsers for transactions. Please contact the site’s  
Webmaster to make sure the site allows transactions using your device’s Web browser.  
328  
Section 7A: Help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Dial-Up Networking Using Bluetooth Technology  
My Computer Does Not Appear on the Trusted Devices Screen  
If you select Add Device and your computer does not appear on the list, make sure that  
the computer’s Bluetooth setting is on and that the computer is discoverable. Check  
with your computer manufacturer for help with locating and changing these settings.  
Select Find More on the Trusted Devices screen again.  
I Get a Message That There Is an Error Creating a DUN Connection With My Palm Centro Smart  
Device  
Re-create the partnership between your Centro device and your computer (see  
Camera  
Here are some tips for taking good pictures with the built-in camera:  
Clean the camera’s lens with a soft, lint-free cloth.  
Take pictures in bright lighting conditions. Low-light images may be grainy, due to the  
sensitivity of the camera.  
Hold the device as still as possible. Try supporting your picture-taking arm up against  
your body or a stationary object (such as a wall).  
Keep the subject of the pictures still. Exposure time is longer with lower light levels, so  
you may see a blur.  
For best results, verify that you have the brightest light source coming from behind you,  
lighting the subject’s face. Avoid taking indoor pictures with the subject in front of a  
window or light.  
Make sure the subject is at least 18 inches (45 centimeters) away from the camera to  
ensure good focus.  
Remember that when you synchronize your device with your computer, your photos and  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
329  
       
Making Room on Your Palm Centro™ Smart Device  
Keep in mind that your Centro device includes an expansion card slot, and that you can  
store applications and information on expansion cards (sold separately). However, you still  
need free memory on the device itself to run applications from an expansion card.  
If you store a large number of entries or install many third-party applications, the internal  
memory on your Centro device may fill up. Here are some common ways to clear space on  
your device:  
Email. Messages that have large attachments can quickly consume memory on your  
device. Delete emails with large attachments. If you have hundreds of messages with or  
without attachments, you may want to delete older messages to make room (see the  
User Guide for the VersaMail Application located on your Palm Software Installation CD,  
or visit go.palm.com/centro-sprint/ for more information.)  
Pics&Videos Pictures can consume excessive memory. Move your pictures to an  
expansion card, synchronize them to your computer (see “Viewing Pictures and Videos  
on Your Computer” on page 194), or upload them to your account on the Sprint Picture  
Mail Web site, and then delete large files from your Centro device (see “Deleting a  
Music. Music files often consume excessive memory. Move music files to an expansion  
card, or delete large files from your device.  
Internet. If you have set a large Web browser cache, you may want to clear the cache  
Third-party applications. You can delete infrequently used applications (see “Removing  
Applications” on page 253) or move them to an expansion card (see “Using Expansion  
330  
Section 7A: Help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Third-Party Applications  
Some third-party applications can cause conflicts with your Centro device. Third-party  
applications that modify the wireless features of your device may require extra  
troubleshooting. If you recently installed an application and your Centro device seems to be  
stuck, try the following:  
2. If the problem persists, perform a system reset (see “System Reset” on page 304).  
3. Delete the most recently installed application from your Centro device (see  
4. If the problem persists, perform another system reset.  
5. If possible, synchronize your device with your computer to back up your most recent  
information.  
6. If you’re unable to perform the steps above or the problem persists, locate your  
Backup folder on your computer and rename the folder (for example, BackupOld).  
Note that “Palm” in the following locations might be “Handspring” or “palmOne,”  
based on the device you’re upgrading from:  
Windows: C:\Program Files\Palm\device name.  
Mac: Mac HD/Users/<User Name>/Documents/Palm/Users/<Device Name>.  
8. Synchronize to restore your Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, Memos, and Pics&Videos  
information. You may need to manually restore information in other applications.  
9. If the problem is resolved, begin reinstalling your third-party applications one at a  
time by double-clicking a single file in the original Backup folder that you renamed,  
and sync after each application you install.  
10. If the problem recurs, delete the last application you installed and report the problem  
to its developer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
331  
     
Remember that not all third-party applications were written with the Centro smart device  
by Palm in mind. You may encounter strange behavior or errors in these applications if you  
use the keyboard and 5-way  
.
Getting More Help  
Contact the author or vendor of any third-party software if you require further assistance.  
Sprint does not provide technical support for applications that are not built into your  
Centro device.  
332  
Section 7A: Help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Errors  
Your Centro device is designed to minimize interruptions when a system error occurs. If  
your device encounters a system error, it automatically resets itself and resumes  
functioning as normal. If possible, it even turns the phone back on if it was on before the  
error occurred.  
Sometimes you might want to know more about an error. The Centro smart device by Palm  
uses a special interface to show error messages in greater detail.  
1. Press Phone  
.
2. Enter ##377, and then press Talk  
.
3. Review the screen with details about the conditions that led up to the most recent  
automatic reset.  
4. Select OK.  
Please note that third-party developers create their own error messages. If you do not  
understand an error message, please contact the developer of the application for help.  
Fixing an Error 67 Message  
1. Press Phone  
2. From the Dial Pad, enter ##data.  
3. Press Menu  
.
.
4. Select Update Vision Profile from the Options menu.  
5. Select Now.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
333  
         
Where to Learn More  
For a Quick Introduction  
Quick Tour: The Quick Tour introduces you to many of your Centro device’s features. It is  
already installed on your device, and you can open it any time. Press Applications  
and then select Quick Tour  
,
.
While Using Your Device  
On-device User Guide: A copy of this guide that is specially formatted for your device  
screen. To view the on-device guide, press Applications  
, select My Centro  
select the Support tab, and then select User Guide.  
You can also download a copy of the User Guide at go.palm.com/centro-sprint/.  
Tips: Many of the built-in applications include helpful tips for getting the most out of  
your device. To view these tips, open an application, press Menu  
, select Options, and  
then select Tips.  
Information: Many screens have a Tips  
icon to learn about the tasks you can perform in that dialog box.  
icon in the upper-right corner. Select the Tips  
Online support from Palm: For up-to-date downloads, troubleshooting, and support  
information, go to go.palm.com/centro-sprint/.  
Setup help: If you need help with setup, call 1-866-750-PALM (7256). This service is FREE  
within 90 days of purchase. Our support staff can help you set up your device and get  
you up and running. We can best assist you if your device is fully charged and you call  
from a phone other than your Centro device.  
334  
Section 7A: Help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
If You Need More Information  
Windows VistaTM users: For information on using your device and desktop software with  
Windows VistaTM, visit www.palm.com/windowsvista.  
Books: Many books on Palm OS® by ACCESS devices are available in local or online book  
retailers (look in the computers section), or visit go.palm.com/centro-sprint/.  
Online forums: Consult online Centro device user discussion groups to swap  
information and learn about topics you may find nowhere else. Visit  
Visiting the Sprint Web Site  
You can get up-to-date information on Sprint services and options by signing on to the  
Sprint Web site at www.sprint.com.  
When you visit Sprint online, you can:  
Review coverage maps.  
Learn how to use voicemail.  
Access your account information.  
Purchase accessories.  
Add options to your service plan.  
Check out frequently asked questions.  
And more.  
Reaching Sprint Customer Service  
You can reach Sprint Customer Service many different ways:  
On your Centro device, press Phone  
; enter *2, and then press Talk  
.
Sign on to your account at www.sprint.com.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
335  
                     
Call toll-free at 1-800-SPRINT1 (1-800-777-4681) (consumer customers),  
–or–  
1-800-927-2199 (business customers).  
Write to Sprint Customer Service, P.O. Box 8077, London, KY 40742.  
Receiving Automated Invoicing Information  
For your convenience, your phone gives you access to invoicing information on your Sprint  
Account. This information includes balance due, payment received, invoicing cycle, and the  
number of minutes used since your last invoicing cycle. (Normal airtime usage applies.)  
Press Phone  
, enter *4, and then press Talk  
.
This service may not be available in all affiliate areas.  
Note:  
Sprint 411  
You have access to a variety of services and information through Sprint 411, including  
residential, business, and government listings; assistance with local or long-distance calls;  
movie listings; and hotel, restaurant, shopping, and major local event information. There is  
a per-call charge in addition to normal airtime rates.  
Press Phone  
, enter 411, and then press Talk  
.
Sprint Operator Services  
Sprint Operator Services provide assistance when you place collect calls or calls billed to a  
local telephone calling card or third party.  
Press Phone  
, enter 0, and then press Talk  
.
For more information or to see the latest in products and services, visit Sprint online at  
336  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Section 7B  
Glossary  
1xEV-DO (Evolution Data Optimized): A wireless broadband technology (also known as  
EVDO) that is designed for very high-speed data transfer with average download speeds of  
400 to 700Kbps and that is capable of reaching speeds up to a theoretical maximum of  
2.4Mb/s, and upload speeds up to 156Kb/s. The Sprint Power Vision network uses 1xEV-DO  
technology. The 1xEV-DO network is also known as the Sprint Mobile Broadband Network.  
1xRTT: A standard of Mobile Internet connectivity that allows for persistent data  
connections as long as you are actively using your data connection. The average data  
transmission rate is around 70Kb/s, although theoretical limits are 153.6Kb/s. With Sprint  
Power Vision plans, you pay a monthly rate for unlimited data transfer and you don't pay  
for connection time.  
Alt (alternative) : A keyboard key. Enter a letter on the keyboard, and then press Alt  
to access variations such as international characters and symbols.  
Applications  
: The screen on your Palm Centro™ smart device from which you can  
open all applications.  
Auto-off interval: The time of inactivity that passes before the screen on your  
Centro device turns off. The wireless features on your device are unaffected by this setting.  
Beam: To send or receive an entry or application using the infrared port on your  
Centro device.  
Bluetooth® wireless technology: Technology that enables devices such as smart devices,  
mobile phones, and computers to connect wirelessly to each other so that they can  
exchange information over short distances.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
337  
                     
Device name: The name associated with your Centro device that distinguishes it from  
other Palm OS® by ACCESS devices. When you first synchronize your device, you are asked  
to give it a device name. This name appears in the User list in Palm® Desktop software.  
Dialog box: A set of options and command buttons that is enclosed by a border and that  
enables you to carry out a specific task.  
Dial-up networking: Wireless technology that enables you to convert your device into a  
wireless modem so that you can access the Internet from your computer.  
Favorite: A button that provides quick access to a phone number (speed dial) or commonly  
used application (Contacts, Web, Messaging, and so on). You can define up to 70 favorite  
buttons in the Phone application.  
HotSync® manager: The computer application that manages the synchronization with  
your Centro device.  
HotSync technology: The technology that synchronizes your Centro device and your  
computer with the simple press of a button.  
Infrared (IR): A way of transmitting information using light waves. The IR port on your  
Centro device enables you to transfer information between other IR devices within a short  
radius.  
Lithium-ion (Li-ion): The rechargeable battery technology used in your Centro smart  
device.  
On Demand: A Sprint Power Vision feature that allows you to personalize your device’s  
data features.  
Option key : The keyboard button that enables you to access the number, symbol, or  
feature that appears above the letter on each key.  
Palm® Desktop software: A PIM application for computers that helps you manage your  
personal information and keep it synchronized with your Centro device.  
Palm® Install Tool: The component on your Windows computer that enables you to install  
Palm OS applications and other information on your Centro device.  
338  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
Palm OS® by ACCESS: The operating system of your Centro device. Palm OS is known for its  
simplicity of use and for the large number of compatible third-party applications that can  
be added to your Centro device.  
Partnership: Two Bluetooth devices—for example, your device and a hands-free device—  
that can connect because each device finds the same passkey on the other device. Once you  
form a partnership with a device, you don’t need to enter a passkey to connect with that  
device. Partnership is also known as paired relationship, pairing, trusted device, or trusted  
pair on some devices.  
Phone  
: The application on your Centro device that enables you to make and receive  
phone calls.  
Phone as Modem: Feature that enables your device (when connected to the Sprint Power  
Vision network) to be used as a high-speed modem for your computer, using a wired (USB  
sync cable) connection.  
PIM (personal information management): A genre of software that includes applications  
such as Palm Desktop software, Microsoft® Outlook®, Lotus Notes, and ACT!. PIMs  
generally store contacts, schedules, tasks, and memos.  
SMS: The service that enables devices to exchange short text messages almost instantly.  
Text messages are typically exchanged between mobile phones. These messages can  
usually include up to 160 characters. Your device can send and receive SMS messages while  
you are on a voice call.  
Sprint Mobile Broadband Network: An advanced mobile data network using the fastest  
commercially available wireless network technology (EVDO) to deliver broadband-like  
transfer speeds for your data connections. See also 1xEV-DO.  
Sprint Picture Mail: An enhanced Sprint Power Vision messaging service that enables you  
to instantly share pictures and videos with friends and family. You can also manage your  
pictures and videos online.  
Sprint Power Vision: An advanced suite of data services and applications utilizing the  
Sprint Mobile Broadband Network.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
339  
                             
Sprint TV: A Sprint Power Vision service that allows you to view live Mobile Digital TV  
(MDTV) on your Centro device.  
Streaming: Technology that enables you to access media content—for example, to watch  
video or listen to an audio program—directly from the Internet on your device without  
needing to download a file that you save on your device.  
User folder: The folder on your computer that contains both the information you enter in  
Palm Desktop software and the information you enter on your device and synchronize with  
Palm Desktop software.  
340  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Section 8  
Safety and Specifications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
342  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 8A  
Important Safety Information  
In This Section  
This guide contains important operational and safety information to help you safely use  
your Palm Centro™ smart device. Failure to read and follow the information provided in this  
guide may result in serious bodily injury, death, or property damage.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
343  
       
FCC Notice  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital  
device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide  
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This  
equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and  
used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio  
communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a  
particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or  
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the  
user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following  
measures:  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the  
receiver is connected.  
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Palm could void the user’s authority to  
operate this equipment.  
The following statement is normally required to be on the FCCID label. If the device is too  
small, the statement must be included in the user manual.  
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following  
two conditions:  
This device may not cause harmful interference, and  
This device must accept any interferences received, including interference that may  
cause undesired operation.  
344  
Section 8A: Safety  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Precautions  
There are several simple guidelines to operating your device properly and maintaining safe,  
satisfactory service.  
Speak directly into the microphone.  
Avoid exposing your device and accessories to rain or liquid spills. If your device does  
get wet, immediately turn the power off and remove the battery.  
Although your device is quite sturdy, it is a complex piece of equipment and can be  
broken. Avoid dropping, hitting, or bending it, or sitting on it.  
Any changes or modifications to your device not expressly approved in this document  
could void your warranty for this equipment and void your authority to operate this  
equipment.  
For the best care of your device, only Sprint authorized personnel should  
service your device and accessories. Failure to do so may be dangerous  
and void your warranty.  
Note:  
Usage Log Your smart device includes a Usage Log that records software application  
launches and any device crashes or resets. A hard reset will not erase the Usage Log. We  
may, for diagnostic purposes, access the Usage Log in products returned to Palm.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
345  
   
Maintaining Safe Use of and Access to Your Device  
Do Not Rely on Your Device’s Phone for Emergency Calls  
Wireless phones such as the one on your Centro device operate using radio signals, which  
cannot guarantee connection in all conditions. Therefore you should never rely solely upon  
any wireless phone for essential communication (for example, medical emergencies).  
Emergency calls may not be possible on all cellular networks or when certain network  
services and/or phone features are in use. Check with your local service provider for details.  
Using Your Phone While Driving  
Talking on your phone while driving (or operating the phone without a hands-free device)  
is prohibited in some jurisdictions. Laws vary as to specific restrictions. Remember that  
safety always comes first.  
Purchase an optional hands-free accessory at your local Sprint Store. For  
more information, visit www.sprint.com.  
Note:  
Following Safety Guidelines  
To operate your device safely and efficiently, always follow any special regulations in a  
given area. Turn your device’s phone off in areas where use is forbidden or when it may  
cause interference or danger.  
Using Your Device’s Phone Near Other Electronic Devices  
Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from radiofrequency (RF) signals. However,  
RF signals from wireless phones may affect inadequately shielded electronic equipment.  
RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic operating  
systems and/or entertainment systems in motor vehicles. Check with the manufacturer or  
their representative to determine if these systems are adequately shielded from external  
346  
Section 8A: Safety  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
RF signals. Also check with the manufacturer regarding any equipment that has been  
added to your vehicle.  
Consult the manufacturer of any personal medical devices, such as pacemakers and  
hearing aids, to determine if they are adequately shielded from external RF signals.  
Always turn off the phone in health care facilities and request  
permission before using the phone near medical equipment.  
Note:  
Turning Off Your Phone Before Flying  
Turn off your phone before boarding any aircraft. To prevent possible interference with  
aircraft systems, the U.S. Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) regulations require you to  
have permission from a crew member to use your phone while the plane is on the ground.  
To prevent any risk of interference, FCC regulations prohibit using your phone while the  
plane is in the air.  
Turning Off Your Phone in Dangerous Areas  
To avoid interfering with blasting operations, turn your phone off when in a blasting area  
or in other areas with signs indicating two-way radios should be turned off. Construction  
crews often use remote-control RF devices to set off explosives.  
Turn your phone off when you’re in any area that has a potentially explosive atmosphere.  
Although it’s rare, your phone and accessories could generate sparks. Sparks can cause an  
explosion or fire, resulting in bodily injury or even death. These areas are often, but not  
always, clearly marked. They include:  
Fueling areas such as gas stations.  
Below deck on boats.  
Fuel or chemical transfer or storage facilities.  
Areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust, or metal  
powders.  
Any other area where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle’s engine.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
347  
 
Never transport or store flammable gas, flammable liquid, or explosives  
in the compartment of your vehicle that contains your phone or  
accessories.  
Note:  
Restricting Children’s Access to Your Device  
Your Centro device is not a toy. Do not allow children to play with it as they could hurt  
themselves and others, damage the device and/or its phone, or make calls that increase  
your monthly bill.  
348  
Section 8A: Safety  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using Your Phone With a Hearing Aid Device  
Your Palm® Centro™ smart device is compliant with the FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility  
(HAC) requirements. For additional HAC information, including the HAC rating of this  
product, please refer to www.palm.com/centroHAC.  
Your device has been tested for hearing aid device compatibility. When some wireless  
phones are used near some hearing devices (hearing aids and cochlear implants), users may  
detect a buzzing, humming, or whining noise. Some hearing devices are more immune  
than others to this interference noise, and phones also vary in the amount of interference  
they generate.  
The wireless telephone industry has developed ratings for some of their mobile phones, to  
assist hearing-device users in finding phones that may be compatible with their hearing  
devices. Not all phones have been rated. Phones that have been rated have a label on the  
box. Your Centro smart device by Palm phone has an M4 and T4 rating.  
These ratings are not guarantees. Results will vary, depending on the level of immunity of  
your hearing device and the degree of your hearing loss. If your hearing device happens to  
be vulnerable to interference, you may not be able to use a rated phone successfully. Trying  
out the phone with your hearing device is the best way to evaluate it for your personal  
needs.  
M-Ratings: Phones rated M3 or M4 meet FCC requirements and are likely to generate less  
interference with hearing devices than phones that are not labeled. M4 is the  
better/higher of the two ratings.  
T-Ratings: Phones rated T3 or T4 meet FCC requirements and are likely to be more usable  
with a hearing device’s telecoil (“T Switch” or “Telephone Switch”) than unrated phones. T4  
is the better/higher of the two ratings. (Note that not all hearing devices contain telecoils.)  
The more immune your hearing aid device is, the less likely you are to experience  
interference noise from your wireless phone. Hearing aid devices should have ratings  
similar to those of phones. Ask your hearing health-care professional for the rating of your  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
349  
         
hearing aid. Add the rating of your hearing aid and your phone to determine probable  
usability:  
Any combined rating equal to or greater than six offers best use.  
Any combined rating equal to five is considered normal use.  
Any combined rating equal to four is considered usable.  
Thus, if you pair an M3 hearing aid with an M3 phone, you will have a combined rating of  
six for “best use.” This is synonymous for T ratings.  
Palm further suggests that you experiment with multiple phones (even those not labeled  
M3/T3 or M4/T4) while in the store to find the one that works best with your hearing aid  
device. If you experience interference or find the quality of service unsatisfactory after  
purchasing your device, promptly return it to the store within 30 days of purchase. With  
the Palm 30-day Risk-Free Guarantee, you may return the device within 30 days of  
purchase for a full refund, and you will only be responsible for charges based on your actual  
usage.  
Getting the Best Hearing Device Experience With Your Device  
To further minimize interference:  
There is usually less interference on the microphone setting than on the telecoil  
setting.  
Set the phone’s screen and keyboard backlight settings to ensure the minimum time  
interval.  
Move the phone around to find the point with the least interference.  
If your hearing aid is equipped with a telecoil, turn on the HAC setting on your device.  
Turning on the HAC Setting  
When the HAC setting is on, your device sends the audio from your phone calls to the  
telecoil rather than to the microphone of your hearing aid. You are likely to hear calls much  
better because volume is increased and background noise and feedback are diminished.  
The HAC setting improves only the calls you listen to through the earpiece. Turn off your  
350  
Section 8A: Safety  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
device's Bluetooth Wireless feature. It does not affect calls heard on the speakerphone or  
with a car kit or headset. HAC requires extra battery power, so watch your battery  
consumption when it's turned on.  
Do not turn on the HAC setting unless you use a hearing aid with a  
telecoil. Using this setting without a hearing aid or with a hearing aid  
without a telecoil may be harmful to your hearing.  
Caution:  
2. Press Phone  
.
3. Press Menu  
.
4. Select Options and then select Phone Preferences.  
5. Check the Hearing Aid Compatibility box.  
6. Select OK.  
351  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Caring for the Battery  
Protecting Your Battery  
The guidelines listed below help you get the most out of your battery’s performance.  
Recently there have been some public reports of wireless phone batteries overheating,  
catching fire, or exploding. It appears that many, if not all, of these reports involve  
counterfeit or inexpensive, aftermarket-brand batteries with unknown or questionable  
manufacturing standards. Sprint is not aware of similar problems with Centro devices  
resulting from the proper use of batteries and accessories approved by Sprint or the  
manufacturer of your phone. Use only Sprint or manufacturer-approved batteries and  
accessories found at Sprint Stores or through your device’s manufacturer, or call  
1-866-343-1114 to order. They’re also available at www.sprint.com—click Accessories  
under the Shop & Browse menu. Buying the right batteries and accessories is the best  
way to ensure they’re genuine and safe.  
In order to avoid damage, charge the battery only in temperatures that range from 32°  
F to 113° F (0° C to 45° C).  
Don’t use the battery charger in direct sunlight or in high humidity areas, such as the  
bathroom.  
Never dispose of the battery by incineration.  
Keep the metal contacts on top of the battery clean.  
Don’t attempt to disassemble or short-circuit the battery.  
The battery may need recharging if it has not been used for a long period of time.  
It’s best to replace the battery when it no longer provides acceptable performance. It  
can be recharged hundreds of times before it needs replacing.  
Don’t store the battery in high temperature areas for long periods of time. It’s best to  
follow these storage rules:  
Less than one month: -4° F to 140° F (-20° C to 60° C)  
More than one month: -4° F to 113° F (-20° C to 45° C)  
352  
Section 8A: Safety  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Battery Safety Information  
Do not disassemble or open, crush, bend or deform, puncture or shred.  
Do not modify or remanufacture, attempt to insert foreign objects into the battery,  
immerse or expose to water or other liquids, expose to fire, explosion or other hazard.  
Only use the battery for the system for which it is specified.  
Only use the battery with a charging system that has been qualified with the system  
per this standard. Use of an unqualified battery or charger may present a risk of fire,  
explosion, leakage, or other hazard.  
Do not short circuit a battery or allow metallic conductive objects to contact battery  
terminals.  
Replace the battery only with another battery that has been qualified with the system  
per this standard, IEEE-Std-1725-200x. Use of an unqualified battery may present a risk  
of fire, explosion, leakage or other hazard.  
Promptly dispose of used batteries in accordance with local regulations.  
Battery usage by children should be supervised.  
Avoid dropping the phone or battery. If the phone or battery is dropped, especially on a  
hard surface, and the user suspects damage, take it to a service center for inspection.  
Improper battery use may result in a fire, explosion or other hazard.  
Disposal of Lithium-Ion (Li-Ion) Batteries  
Do not handle a damaged or leaking li-ion battery as you can be burned.  
For safe disposal options of your li-ion batteries, contact your nearest Palm authorized  
service center.  
Special Note: Be sure to dispose of your battery properly. In some areas, the disposal of  
batteries in household or business trash may be prohibited.  
353  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Radiofrequency (RF) Energy  
Understanding How Your Phone Operates  
Your phone is basically a radio transmitter and receiver. When it’s turned on, it receives and  
transmits radiofrequency (RF) signals. When you use your phone, the system handling your  
call controls the power level. This power can range from 0.006 watts to 0.2 watts in digital  
mode.  
Knowing Radiofrequency Safety  
The design of your Centro smart device by Palm complies with updated NCRP standards  
described below.  
In 1991-92, the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) and the American  
National Standards Institute (ANSI) joined in updating ANSI’s 1982 standard for safety  
levels with respect to human exposure to RF signals. More than 120 scientists, engineers  
and physicians from universities, government health agencies and industries developed  
this updated standard after reviewing the available body of research. In 1993, the Federal  
Communications Commission (FCC) adopted this updated standard in a regulation. In  
August 1996, the FCC adopted hybrid standard consisting of the existing ANSI/IEEE  
standard and the guidelines published by the National Council of Radiation Protection and  
Measurements (NCRP).  
Body-Worn Operation  
To maintain compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines, if you wear a handset on your  
body, use the Palm-supplied or -approved carrying case, holster, or other body-worn  
accessory. Use of non-Palm-approved accessories may violate FCC RF exposure guidelines.  
Be sure to use an accessory that contains NO metal (snaps, clips, etc.) and provides AT  
LEAST 1.5 cm of separation between the users body and the unit.  
For more information about RF exposure, visit the FCC Web site at www.fcc.gov.  
354  
Section 8A: Safety  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) for Wireless Phones  
The SAR is a value that corresponds to the relative amount of RF energy absorbed in the  
head of a user of a wireless handset.  
The SAR value of a phone is the result of an extensive testing, measuring, and calculation  
process. It does not represent how much RF the phone emits. All phone models are tested  
at their highest value in strict laboratory settings. But when in operation, the SAR of a  
phone can be substantially less than the level reported to the FCC. This is because of a  
variety of factors including its proximity to a base station antenna, phone design, and  
other factors. What is important to remember is that each phone meets strict federal  
guidelines. Variations in SARs do not represent a variation in safety.  
All phones must meet the federal standard, which incorporates a substantial margin of  
safety. As stated above, variations in SAR values between different model phones do not  
mean variations in safety. SAR values at or below the federal standard of 1.6 W/kg are  
considered safe for use by the public.  
The highest reported (FCC) SAR values of the Centro smart device by Palm are:  
Maximum SAR Values  
CDMA Cellular  
1.09(W/1Kg)  
0.817 (W/1Kg)  
CDMA PCS  
Head  
Body  
1.35 (W/1Kg)  
0.423 (W/1Kg)  
FCC Radiofrequency Emission  
This phone meets the FCC Radiofrequency Emission Guidelines and is certified with the FCC  
as:  
FCC ID # O8F-747  
IC ID # 3905A-747  
More information on the phone’s SAR can be found from the following FCC Web site:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
355  
 
Bluetooth® Qualification Program  
Information about this listing can be found at:  
Bluetooth® QD ID B013348  
356  
Section 8A: Safety  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Static Electricity, ESD, and Your Device  
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can cause damage to electronic devices if discharged into the  
device, so you should take steps to avoid such an occurrence.  
Description of ESD  
Static electricity is an electrical charge caused by the buildup of excess electrons on the  
surface of a material. To most people, static electricity and ESD are nothing more than  
annoyances. For example, after walking over a carpet while scuffing your feet, building up  
electrons on your body, you may get a shock—the discharge event—when you touch a  
metal doorknob. This little shock discharges the built-up static electricity.  
ESD-Susceptible Equipment  
Even a small amount of ESD can harm circuitry, so when working with electronic devices,  
take measures to help protect your electronic devices, including your Palm® device, from  
ESD harm. While Palm has built protections against ESD into its products, ESD  
unfortunately exists and, unless neutralized, could build up to levels that could harm your  
equipment. Any electronic device that contains an external entry point for plugging in  
anything from cables to docking stations is susceptible to entry of ESD. Devices that you  
carry with you, such as your device, build up ESD in a unique way because the static  
electricity that may have built up on your body is automatically passed to the device. Then,  
when the device is connected to another device such as a docking station, a discharge  
event can occur.  
Precautions Against ESD  
Make sure to discharge any built-up static electricity from yourself and your electronic  
devices before touching an electronic device or connecting one device to another. The  
recommendation from Palm is that you take this precaution before connecting your device  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
357  
     
to your computer, placing the device in a cradle, or connecting it to any other device. You  
can do this in many ways, including the following:  
Ground yourself when you’re holding your mobile device by simultaneously touching a  
metal surface that is at earth ground. For example, if your computer has a metal case  
and is plugged into a standard three-prong grounded outlet, touching the case should  
discharge the ESD on your body.  
Increase the relative humidity of your environment.  
Install ESD-specific prevention items, such as grounding mats.  
Conditions That Enhance ESD Occurrences  
Conditions that can contribute to the buildup of static electricity in the environment  
include the following:  
Low relative humidity.  
Material type (The type of material gathering the charge. For example, synthetics are  
more prone to static buildup than natural fibers like cotton.)  
The rapidity with which you touch, connect, or disconnect electronic devices.  
While you should always take appropriate precautions to discharge static electricity, if you  
are in an environment where you notice ESD events, you may want to take extra  
precautions to protect your electronic equipment against ESD.  
358  
Section 8A: Safety  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Owner’s Record  
The model number, regulatory number, and serial number are located on a nameplate  
inside the battery compartment. Record the serial number in the space provided below.  
This will be helpful if you need to contact us about your phone in the future.  
Model: Palm® Centro™ Smart Device  
Serial No.:  
359  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
User’s Guide Proprietary Notice  
CDMA Technology is licensed by QUALCOMM Incorporated under one or more of the  
following patents:  
4,901,307 5,109,390 5,267,262 5,416,797  
5,506,865 5,544,196 5,657,420 5,101,501  
5,267,261 5,414,796 5,504,773 5,535,239  
5,600,754 5,778,338 5,228,054 5,337,338  
5,710,784 5,056,109 5,568,483 5,659,569  
5,490,165 5,511,073  
User’s Guide template version 5B (October 2005)  
360  
Section 8A: Safety  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Section 8B  
Specifications  
Section 8B: Specifications  
361  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Specifications  
Radio  
CDMA 1900/800 MHz digital dual-band  
EVDO and 1xRTT  
Phone features  
Personal speakerphone  
Microphone mute option  
Hands-free headset jack  
(2.5mm, 3-barrel connector)  
TTY/TDD compatibility  
3-way calling  
Processor technology Intel XScale™ processor, 312MHz  
Expansion  
Battery  
microSD card slot  
Rechargeable lithium-ion  
Removable for replacement  
Palm OS 5.4.9  
3.5 hours full charge time  
Palm OS® by ACCESS  
version  
Camera  
Still image capture resolution (1280 x 1024), 1.3 megapixel  
2x digital zoom  
Video capture resolution (352 x 288)  
Automatic light balance  
Size/weight  
Connectivity  
4.22" x 2.11" x 0.73"  
(107.2 mm x 53.5 mm x 18.6 mm)  
4.2 ounces (118 grams)  
Bluetooth® wireless technology IR  
(1.2-compliant)  
362  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Display  
Touch-sensitive LCD screen (includes stylus)  
65,536 colors (16-bit color)  
User-adjustable brightness  
Keyboard  
Built-in QWERTY keyboard plus 5-way navigator  
Backlight for low lighting conditions  
Included software  
Calculator (basic/advanced)  
Calendar  
Pics&Videos  
Pocket Tunes™ (music)  
SMS (text messages)  
Sprint Mobile Email  
Sprint TV  
Camcorder  
Camera  
Contacts  
Documents To Go®  
Google Maps  
IM (instant messaging)  
Memos  
Tasks  
VersaMail® (email)  
Voice Memo  
Web browser (Internet)  
World Clock  
On Demand  
Palm® Desktop  
software/HotSync® manager  
Phone (includes Palm OS  
Favorites and Dial Pad)  
System requirements Windows XP Service Pack 2,  
Windows Media Center Edition 2005 with USB port, or  
Windows Vista (32-bit version only)  
Mac OS 10.3–10.4.x with USB port  
Later versions may also be supported  
Section 8B: Specifications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
363  
           
Operating and  
storage temperature  
range  
32°F to 104°F (0°C to 40°C)  
5% to 90% relative humidity  
(RH)  
364  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Account Setup command 126  
account username and passwords 26  
accounts  
accessing 26, 335  
customizing email 135  
Index  
Numerics  
1xEV-DO (EVDO) technology 337  
1xRTT networks 96  
downloading from corporate 324  
setting up email 124127  
setting up Sprint service 21, 26  
setting up voicemail 25, 63  
signing on to Instant Messaging 154  
Accounts command 126, 135  
Accounts Setup dialog box 126, 127  
Acrobat files. See PDF files  
activating smart device 22  
Active Call view 65, 69  
ActiveSync. See Exchange ActiveSync  
Add Bookmark command 165  
Add Call button 66, 69  
Add Contact command 68  
Add Favorite dialog box 76  
Add New Number dialog box 68  
Add New Number prompt 68  
Add Song button 207  
1XRTT protocol 337  
411 phone calls 336  
5-way controls 42, 44  
5-way navigator 10, 42  
911 phone calls 91, 93, 290, 346  
A
abbreviated dialing. See 911 phone calls  
AC adapter 17  
AC charger 11, 13, 17  
accented characters 49, 50  
accessing  
account information 26, 335  
alternate characters 49  
application menus 44  
applications 52, 54  
calculator 242  
Dial Pad 57, 66  
Add to a Contact button 68  
Add to trusted device list check box 173  
adding  
accessories 297  
Bluetooth devices 172  
email 296  
online albums 193  
Palm online support 334  
Sprint Power Vision services 106  
Sprint Web site 335  
voicemail 25, 63, 64  
World Clock 240  
bookmarks 163, 165, 166  
caller ID pictures 217  
accessories 297  
caller ID ringtones 89, 217  
account invoices 336  
Index  
365  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
cities to World Clock 240  
contacts 68, 216  
alert icon 97  
Alert Manager 311  
emoticons 146  
events 221223, 224  
memos 234  
partnerships 81, 170, 173, 175  
passwords 26  
phone numbers 68, 72  
QuickText phrases 146, 155  
signatures 138  
Alert me of new mail check box 136  
alert preferences 87, 136  
Alert screens 63, 98, 99, 147  
alert tones 87, 136, 152  
alerts  
adding to events 223, 228  
assigning to tasks 233  
songs to playlists 207, 208  
tasks 230  
voice captions 183  
clearing 99  
receiving messages and 136, 147, 151,  
address book 74  
addresses  
receiving pages and 64  
receiving phone calls and 61  
receiving voicemail and 63  
viewing 979899, 152  
Alerts command 136, 152  
aligning the screen 280, 310  
Also delete message(s) on server option 134  
Alt key 47, 337  
adding automatically 77  
entering 122, 129, 142, 144, 155  
selecting 148  
sending to multiple recipients and 122,  
adjusting volume. See volume  
Advanced Mode (calculator) 242, 243, 244  
After deleting a message pick list 133  
Agenda view 220, 227  
alarm clock 241  
alternate characters 49, 50  
Always route calls to Hands-Free check box 84  
anniversaries 224  
Answer button 61, 69  
Alarm Sound pick list 228, 233  
alarm tones 228  
AOL services 115  
alarms 12, 86, 87, 223, 276  
See also alerts  
album art 203  
Album pick list 130, 183, 184  
albums (music) 203  
application categories 52  
Application favorite button 77  
application preferences 29281282, 284  
application settings. See application  
preferences  
albums (Pics&Videos) 183189191  
366  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
applications  
Archive folder 253  
See also third-party applications  
accessing 52, 54  
associating with buttons 77, 283  
beaming 260  
categorizing 281  
closing menus in 45  
composing email messages and 130  
copying 261, 271  
area codes 90  
area conversions (calculator) 243  
arrow icons (documentation) 42  
Attach from device option 145  
Attach from Online option 145  
Attach Signature check box 138  
attachment formats 132, 237  
attachments  
cycling through 52  
displaying 124, 132  
displaying information about 255  
displaying list of 282  
downloading automatically 137  
downloading large 132  
removing 131  
displaying menus in 44  
displaying recently used 52  
downloading 161, 250, 251  
installing 249252, 309  
making phone calls and 67  
opening 5152, 270, 283  
removing 253, 254  
running 330  
searching 248  
selecting 52  
saving 133  
sending voice memos as 131  
sending with email 130, 131, 132  
storing large 330  
troubleshooting 323  
Attachments dialog box 130, 131, 132  
attendee information 226  
audio captions 183, 187, 188  
audio files 202  
sending over Bluetooth connections 256  
setting default 284  
See also music; music files  
Audio folder 202, 204  
synchronizing information in 35, 36, 262  
transferring to device 29  
updating information in 35  
viewing private entries in 294  
viewing tips for 334  
Applications button 10, 51, 52  
Applications view 51, 52, 282, 337  
appointments 220, 316  
See also calendar; events  
audio player. See Pocket Tunes  
audio quality 321  
Auto answer pick list 84  
Auto Lock Device option 292  
Auto naming pick list 186  
Auto Sync command 135  
Auto Sync dialog box 135  
Auto Sync operations 135, 136, 322, 324  
Auto-complete check box 167  
Index  
367  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Auto-Keyguard pick list 289  
automated invoicing information 336  
Automatically set pick list 223  
Auto-off after pick list 287  
Beam Status dialog box 260, 261  
beaming 259261, 337  
beeps. See alarms  
Before data connections pick list 95  
Before outgoing calls pick list 95  
bell 98, 311  
billing information 106  
birthdays 224  
blank screens 310  
blinking bell 98, 311  
Bluetooth adapters 175  
Bluetooth application 171, 173  
Bluetooth button 81  
Bluetooth devices  
adding 172  
connecting to 80170173  
creating partnerships for 81, 170, 175  
customizing 84  
auto-off interval 287, 337  
B
Background check box 227  
background images 227  
background music 188, 207  
backing up information 28, 29  
backlight (keyboard) 47, 278, 287  
Backlight key 278  
Backspace key 58  
Backup folder 253, 254, 302  
Basic Mode (calculator) 242  
battery  
caring for 352353  
charging 1516, 17, 18  
disposing of 353  
inserting 13  
maximizing life of 1718, 287  
recharging 17, 18  
replacing 14, 297307308  
viewing status of 15, 16, 97, 98  
battery door 11  
battery icon 16, 18, 97, 98  
battery specifications 362  
Bcc option (email) 129  
Beam Business Card command 219  
Beam Category command 260  
Beam command 260  
Beam Receive pick list 287  
discovering 170, 172  
entering device names for 81, 171  
maximizing battery life and 18  
receiving information over 257  
routing phone calls to 80, 82, 84  
sending over 256  
synchronizing over 265266  
transferring calls from 65  
troubleshooting 319, 320, 329  
viewing status of 97  
Bluetooth feature, enabling 170  
Bluetooth icon 81, 97, 171  
Bluetooth Preferences screen 97  
368  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
bonus software 37, 249, 250  
Bookmark Page icon 166  
bookmarks 163, 165, 166, 259  
Bookmarks icon 166  
calendar  
See also Calendar application  
adding alerts to 223, 228  
adding background pictures to 227  
adding events to 221223, 224  
color-coding 225, 227  
customizing 226228  
displaying 220  
moving through 221  
redefining time intervals for 224  
rescheduling events on 226  
selecting views for 220, 226  
setting first day of week for 280  
synchronizing 36, 138, 222, 316, 317  
transferring to smart device 29  
viewing events on 85, 98  
Calendar application  
Bookmarks view 166  
border glow (highlight) 43  
brightness 18, 278, 287, 310  
broadband connections 96, 111, 337, 339  
browser. See Web browser  
built-in applications 249, 253  
built-in camera. See camera  
business cards 219, 260  
buttons  
accessing command 44  
accidentally pressing 66  
assigning Quick Keys to 75, 77  
changing favorite 77  
creating favorite 7577  
opening applications and 51  
reassigning 283  
receiving text messages and 147  
restoring default settings for 283  
selecting 43, 44  
opening 51  
setting display options in 226  
setting sound preferences from 228  
updating information in 35, 36, 138  
Calendar button 10, 220  
Call forward pick list 72  
Buttons Preferences screen 283  
call forwarding 7172, 91  
call forwarding icon 97  
call lists. See Call Log  
C
cache 168, 330  
Calc icon 242  
calculating device space 29  
calculator 242244  
Calculator application 242  
Call Log 60, 68  
Call Log button (Redial list) 60  
Call Log favorite button 60, 77  
call waiting 69  
Index  
369  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Call Waiting dialog box 69  
caller ID pictures 89  
caller ID ringtones 89, 217, 239  
calling cards 336  
calling Sprint Customer Service 26  
calls. See phone calls  
Category pick list 227, 281  
Cc option (email) 129  
CDs 205  
Centro Smart Device. See smart device  
Change Lock Code option 291  
changing  
call-waiting alerts 61  
camcorder 145  
bookmarks 166  
color schemes 280  
Camcorder application 184, 186, 190  
Camcorder icon 184  
camera  
contact information 218  
default settings 275  
device names 81  
adjusting zoom setting for 183  
customizing settings for 186  
maximizing battery life and 18  
taking pictures with 145182183, 329  
Camera application 182, 186, 190  
Camera icon 182  
events 226  
favorite buttons 77  
owner information 295  
passwords 26  
playlists 208  
screen fonts 278279  
channel icon 210  
camera lens 12  
camera specifications 362  
Cancel button (Active Call) 65  
Cancel Spkr button 65  
Caps Lock 48  
channel list 210  
character searches 58  
characters  
creating memos and 234  
displaying alternate 49  
entering 48, 49  
car kits 79, 82  
Card Info application 272  
Card Info button 272  
card readers 204  
categorizing  
applications 281  
contacts 89  
reassigning Quick Keys and 75  
searching on 248  
events 225  
memos 234  
tasks 230, 231  
Category command 281  
sending messages and invalid 146  
charger 11, 13, 17  
charger adapter 17  
charger cable 34  
370  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
charger jack 11  
computers  
charging the battery 1516, 17, 18  
chat preferences 151  
chat session icon 150  
chat sessions 105, 149, 154  
Chat view 149  
See also Mac computers; Windows  
computers  
connecting to 34  
removing applications from 254  
storing pictures and videos on 194  
synchronizing over 28, 32, 311, 323  
system requirements for 28  
transferring music from 202  
updating information on 35  
conduit software 33, 315  
Conf button 70  
conference calls 697071, 73  
Confirm message deletions check box 151  
Connect to the Internet dialog box 104  
connection icons 96, 106  
Connection Manager 110  
Connection Manager icon 110  
connections  
accessing corporate information and 138  
browsing the Web and 157, 158, 165,  
closing 111, 177  
communicating with Bluetooth devices  
device to PCs 34  
enabling phone as modem 110  
enabling Sprint Power Vision 104  
making phone calls and 67  
maximizing battery life and 18  
receiving information over Bluetooth 257  
selecting networks for 95  
city information 240  
city pick list 240  
Clear Cache button 168  
Clear cache on exit check box 168  
Clear Cookies button 168  
Clear Voicemail Icon button 92  
clock 240  
clock preferences 285  
closing  
menus 45  
phone-as-modem connections 111  
pick lists 45  
collect phone calls 336  
color palette 186  
color preferences 280  
color-coded category marker 227  
color-coding events 225, 227  
color-coding messages 151  
colored backgrounds 43  
Colors Theme screen 280  
command buttons 44  
compact discs 205  
completed tasks 231, 233  
completion dates 233  
Compose dialog box 142, 145  
Compress Day View check box 227  
compressed files 250, 251  
Index  
371  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
troubleshooting 318, 322, 326, 328  
viewing status of 96  
controls 9, 11, 12  
conversion functions 243  
cookies 167, 168  
connectivity specifications 362  
constants 243  
Copy to Ringtone command 239  
copying  
Contact Edit dialog box 89, 217  
contact names, dialing by 58  
contacts  
applications 261, 271  
music 202  
phone numbers 57  
adding 216  
pictures 190  
assigning pictures to 89, 191  
categorizing 89  
changing information for 218  
creating 68  
deleting 219  
entering multiple 216  
entering phone numbers for 68, 90  
mapping location of 218  
marking as private 217  
searching for 58, 85  
text 163  
video clips 190, 202  
corporate address lists 124  
corporate mail systems 114, 296, 324  
corporate servers 32, 138, 296  
country-specific formats 279  
coupling 318  
coverage area 18, 96, 318  
Coverage in/out pick list 87  
coverage maps 335  
sending messages to 122, 129, 142, 144,  
setting caller ID ringtones for 89, 217  
synchronizing 36, 138  
transferring to smart device 29  
viewing information about 58, 59  
Contacts application  
changing screen fonts for 278  
managing contact information and 216–  
Create a New Contact button 68  
Create chats from messages pick list 151  
creating  
bookmarks 163, 165, 166  
business cards 219  
contacts 68  
email messages 122129130  
favorite buttons 7577  
memos 234  
multimedia messages 144145, 146  
partnerships 81, 170, 173, 175  
passwords 26  
opening 216  
updating information in 35, 36, 138  
Contacts favorite button 58, 77, 216  
Contacts list 58, 142, 144, 218  
playlists 207208  
QuickText phrases 146  
372  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
signatures 138  
Date stamp pick list 186  
dates 240, 285  
See also calendar  
text messages 61142143, 146  
voice captions 183  
Day view 221, 227  
voice memos 238  
decompression utility 251  
Default Alarm pick list 228  
Default Apps Preferences screen 284  
default settings, restoring 283  
Default View pick list 226  
delays 292  
Delete command 134  
Delete Contact command 219  
Delete Events Older Than pick list 226  
Delete From pick list 253  
Delete List button 208  
Delete Memo command 234  
Delete Old command 134  
Delete Task command 232  
deleting  
current event 85, 98  
Current Privacy pick list 293, 294  
Customer Service (Sprint) 26, 335  
customer support (Palm) 334  
customizing  
Bluetooth devices 84  
calendar 226228  
camera settings 186  
chat sessions 151  
display formats 279  
favorite buttons 75  
messaging settings 151152  
phone 8592  
quick buttons 283  
smart device 275  
tasks 233  
alerts 99  
VersaMail 135138  
Web browser 167168  
Web page content 107  
applications 253, 254  
attachments 131  
bookmarks 166  
contacts 219  
device names 31  
email 133134, 330  
events 226  
favorite buttons 77  
groups of messages 134  
memos 234  
photos 183  
D
Daily Repeating Events check box 228  
data connections. See connections  
data services 107, 324, 326  
See also Sprint Power Vision services  
Date & Time Preferences screen 285  
date formats 280  
Date pick list 280  
songs from playlists 208  
Index  
373  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
tasks 232  
text 58  
text messages 148  
videos 184  
desktop software 33, 36, 139, 309  
See also Palm Desktop software  
device names  
dialog boxes 44, 334, 338  
dial-up networking 174, 176, 329, 338  
dial-up networking icon 97  
dial-up networking modems 174  
digital movies 105  
digital pictures 105  
changing 81  
creating 81, 171  
defined 338  
deleting 31  
displaying 338  
synchronizing and 31  
transferring to new device 31  
devices  
See also Bluetooth devices; Palm OS devices;  
smart device  
directory assistance 336  
Disable cascading style sheets option 168  
Disable Cookies check box 167  
Disable JavaScript check box 167  
Discovery icon 172  
Discovery Results list 172  
display formats 279  
connecting to TTY 93  
electrostatic discharge and 357358  
radiofrequency emissions and 346354–  
setting visibility options for 171  
upgrades and 31  
Display my name in chat window as  
option 151  
display options (calendar) 226  
Display Options command 226  
Display Options dialog box 226  
display. See screen  
Dial another call? prompt 69  
Dial button 59  
displaying  
alerts 979899, 152  
Dial Extra Digits Automatically option 76  
Dial Number dialog box 59  
Dial Pad 56, 57, 66, 85  
Dial Pad button 66, 77  
Dial Preferences command 90  
Dial Preferences dialog box 90  
dial tones 91  
alternate characters 49  
applications 281, 282  
attachments 124, 132  
calendar 220  
connection status 96  
contact information 58, 59, 218  
device names 338  
dialing 5759, 76, 90  
email messages 128  
374  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
error messages 333  
events 85, 98, 228  
software 161, 250, 251  
User Guide 334  
favorite buttons 59, 76, 85  
HotSync Log 314  
images 158, 328  
Downloads bookmark 161  
downward-pointing arrows 45  
Drafts button 130  
instant messages 155  
Drafts folder 145  
items in pick lists 45  
menu items 44  
numeric pages 64  
draining the battery 16, 17, 18  
drop-down lists. See pick lists  
dropped calls 87  
phone numbers 59, 60  
pictures 187, 193, 194  
private entries 293, 294  
tasks 227, 231, 233  
text messages 149  
DTMF tones 91  
Due Date pick list 230  
due dates 230, 231, 233  
DUN connections. See dial-up networking  
E
unread messages 227  
video clips 184, 188, 193, 194  
Web pages 158, 163, 165  
documentation 2, 8, 42, 54, 334  
Documents application 124, 236, 237  
Documents icon 237  
Documents screen 131  
Documents To Go 236  
Don’t download images option 168  
Download attachments check box 137  
downloading  
attachments 132  
bonus software 249  
email messages 128, 135, 136, 138  
files 137, 161, 250  
music 202  
E-911 services 91  
earpiece 9, 10, 65, 82, 318  
echos 318, 319  
Edit Bookmarks command 166  
Edit Category dialog box 281  
Edit Favorites Button command 77  
Edit Playlist screen 208  
Edit QuickText option 146  
editing 237  
Effects pick list 186  
electrostatic discharge 357358  
email  
accessing 296  
adding attachments to 130132  
adding signatures to 138  
adding Web links to 148  
addressing 77  
Outlook 36  
ringtones 86  
Index  
375  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
checking status of 128  
checking unread messages for 227  
creating 122129130  
deleting 133134, 330  
getting 128, 135, 136, 138  
making phone calls and 59, 67  
maximizing battery life and 18  
replying to 129  
error messages 333  
errors 333  
Escalate ring tone volume check box 86  
ESMTP, enabling 323  
EVDO technology 337  
event conflicts 98, 227  
event icon 98  
events  
saving drafts 122, 130  
See also calendar  
sending 122, 130, 138  
setting priority for 122, 130  
sorting 128  
adding 221223, 224  
assigning time zones to 222  
changing 226  
synchronizing 35, 138  
color-coding 225, 227  
creating notes for 226  
creating repeating 224  
creating untimed 224  
deleting 226  
troubleshooting 321324  
viewing attachments in 124, 132  
email accounts 124127, 135, 321  
email alerts 136  
email applications 33, 51, 114  
email client software 323  
Email favorite buttons 77  
Email icon 128  
email preferences 135138  
email providers 115, 124, 125  
email services 105  
emergency phone calls 91, 93, 290, 346  
emoticons 155  
displaying 85, 98, 228  
rescheduling 226  
scheduling 222, 224  
setting alarms for 223  
synchronizing 36, 138, 222, 316, 317  
transferring to smart device 29  
viewing duration of 227  
Excel files 131, 132, 236, 237  
Exchange ActiveSync 135, 138, 216, 220,  
Emoticons icon 146  
Empty battery icon 16  
Empty Trash command 134  
Enable Background Playback check box 207  
End button 10  
Exchange servers 124, 138  
expansion card slot 12, 362  
expansion cards  
accessing items on 271  
beaming application from 260  
copying applications to 271  
entry screens 43, 44  
376  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
deleting applications on 253  
downloading to 161  
formatting 272, 273  
downloading 137, 161, 250  
installing quarantined 31  
managing 236237  
opening 237  
inserting 269  
managing files on 236  
naming 272  
opening applications on 270  
removing 270  
storing information on 269, 330  
storing pictures and videos on 182, 189,  
transferring music to 195, 202, 204  
viewing information about 272  
extensions (phone) 66, 76, 90  
Extra Digits button 66  
Extra Digits option 76  
saving 237  
streaming from Web pages 162  
transferring to device 2931, 236  
Files application 271  
financial calculator 243  
financial information 109  
Find dialog box 248  
Find Text on Page command 164  
finding  
blank favorite buttons 76  
contacts 58, 85  
text 164, 248  
user folders 311  
user names 106  
5-way navigator. See navigator  
Flash mode 73  
flight mode 55  
F
fade setting 227  
Fast mode box 168  
favorite buttons  
creating 7577  
defined 338  
folder icon 133  
folder pick list 128  
deleting 77  
folders 128, 311, 340  
Font command 279  
Font size pick list 279  
fonts 278279  
forgetting passwords 292, 294  
Format Card command 273  
Formats Preferences screen 279  
formats, customizing 279  
formatting  
dialing with 59, 76  
displaying 59, 76, 85  
transferring to device 75  
Favorites pages 76, 78  
features 44, 105  
feedback 318  
files  
accessing 296  
attaching to email 131, 132  
date and time 279  
Index  
377  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
expansion cards 272, 273  
numbers 280  
phone numbers 90  
purchasing 346  
setting preferences for 84  
troubleshooting 319320321  
Hands-Free Preferences screen 84  
Hands-free Setup button 81  
Hang Up All button 65, 66, 70  
hard resets 292, 305  
hardware 8  
forums 335  
forwarding phone calls 7172, 91  
Free Space information 30  
freeing memory 253, 330  
Full battery icon 16  
full charge (battery) 15  
full-charge indicator 16  
function keys 47  
headset button 79, 80  
headset icon 82, 97  
headset jack 11  
functions 243  
headsets 11, 66, 79, 80, 97  
Hearing Aid Compatibility setting 92, 351  
hearing devices 93349351  
help 26, 252, 332, 335  
hexadecimal characters 243  
Hide Records option 293  
highlight 43  
highlighting  
items on screen 43, 45  
menu items 44  
G
Game Volume pick list 277  
games 18  
Get Email icon 116  
getting started 2, 22, 23, 35, 44, 104, 334  
Global Address Lists 124  
Gmail services 115  
Go to Next Message option 133  
Google Maps 218, 248  
graphics. See images  
Guest Book 145  
phone numbers 59  
text 44  
Web links 159  
H
high-speed connections 96, 111  
hints 292  
History command 163  
History list 163  
Hold button 66, 69  
holidays 224  
HAC setting 350  
handset speaker 9, 10, 11  
hands-free devices  
connecting to 8083  
creating partnerships for 81  
entering passkeys for 81  
making phone calls and 79, 80, 82, 84  
home city 240  
home pages 167  
378  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HotSync button 283  
information  
HotSync Log 314  
backing up 28, 29  
HotSync manager 262, 266, 338  
HotSync manager icon 262  
HotSync technology 338  
See also synchronizing  
HTML formats 138  
beaming 259261  
changing 28  
draining battery and 17  
entering 28, 48  
losing 294, 305  
hyperlinks. See Web links  
marking as private 293294  
overwriting 263  
protecting 26, 258, 288, 292, 293  
receiving over Bluetooth connections 257  
restoring 311  
setting owner preferences for 295  
storing 269, 330  
synchronizing 28, 33, 35, 262, 314  
transferring to device 29  
updating 28  
information screens 43, 44  
Infrared port. See IR port  
infrared-enabled devices 12  
Install Tool 251, 338  
Installation CD 8, 32  
installation wizard 33, 249  
installer 249  
I
icons 96, 282, 326  
Ignore button 61  
Ignore with Text button 61  
IM application 154  
IM icon 155  
images  
See also pictures  
adding as wallpaper 85  
disabling Web page 168  
displaying on Web pages 158, 328  
saving 161  
IMAP servers 115, 137  
inactive connection icon 96  
Inbox 98, 128, 129, 149, 150  
Inbox icons 128  
Incoming calls received check box 290  
Incoming command 137  
Incoming dialog box 137  
incompatible applications 29, 302  
indicator light 9, 15  
Info command 29  
installing  
bonus software 37, 249, 250  
included software 249252, 309  
quarantined files 31  
Sprint Connection Manager 110  
Sprint Music Manager 196  
synchronization software 3233  
Info screen 29, 255  
Index  
379  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
third-party applications 249, 251, 303,  
Instant Messaging 105154156  
interference 319, 321, 349, 350  
characters  
locking 288  
restoring factory defaults for 283  
selecting menu items from 45  
setting timed events with 222  
silencing ringer from 62  
keyboard backlight 47, 278, 287  
keyboard specifications 363  
Keyguard 288289  
international clock 240  
international travel adapters 297  
Internet  
Known Caller pick list 86  
L
See also Web browsing  
Label color pick list 151  
language settings 309  
Late Breaking News & Photos selection 108  
launching applications 5152  
LCD screen. See screen  
LED light. See indicator light  
length conversions 243  
lens (camera) 12  
accessing 176  
connecting to 157, 158, 165, 174  
installing applications from 250  
setting up proxy servers for 168  
Internet Service Providers 323  
invalid characters 146  
lightning bolts 16  
Li-ion technology 338  
links. See Web links  
invoices 336  
IR port 12, 259, 266, 338  
ISPs. See Internet Service Providers  
iTunes 195, 204  
list screens 43, 44  
List/Thumbnail icon 189  
listening to music 195208  
lists 43, 45  
J
JavaScript 167  
lithium-ion technology 338  
locating  
blank favorite buttons 76  
contacts 58, 85  
text 164, 248  
K
key presses 46  
keyboard  
accessing alternate characters on 49  
creating Quick Keys for 75, 77  
dialing from 58  
user folders 311  
user names 106  
entering information from 4649  
380  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
location information 91  
Location ON icon 96  
Location ON option 91, 96  
Location pick list 285  
locations, transmitting 91  
lock codes 22, 290  
Lock Device screen 292  
lock icon 158, 253, 259, 260  
locking smart device 292293  
locking the keyboard 288  
logic functions (calculator) 243  
losing information 294, 305  
Lost Password option 294  
Lotus Notes servers 124  
lowercase letters 48  
mailbox screens 135  
See also VersaMail 135  
Manage Playlists command 207  
Manage Sound list 132  
MAPI servers 124  
maps 109, 218, 248, 328, 335  
Mask Records option 293  
mathematical constants 243  
mathematical functions 243  
Maximum message size option 137  
MDTV (Mobile Digital TV) 105  
MDTV. See Mobile Digital TV  
media features 18  
media files 161, 202  
Media icon 145  
Media Player 195  
media players 18  
Media type not supported message 162  
memory 168, 226, 253, 330  
memory slots (calculator) 244  
memos 29, 36, 234  
See also voice memos  
Memos application 35, 36, 234, 278  
Memos icon 234  
Menu button 10  
menu items 44, 45  
Menu key 44, 47  
menu shortcuts 45  
menus 44, 45  
Message favorite button 77  
Message Format pick list 138  
M
Mac computers  
installing applications from 251  
installing synchronization software for 32  
listening to music 204  
locating user folders on 312  
removing applications from 254  
synchronizing over 36, 263, 267, 312  
transferring music files from 195, 204,  
transferring pictures from 31  
uninstalling Palm Desktop software  
Mac operating systems 28  
mail. See email  
Mail from last check box 137  
mail servers 124  
Index  
381  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
messages  
See also email; multimedia messages; text  
See also expansion cards  
Microsoft Direct Push technology 139  
See also Direct Push operations  
ActiveSync  
Microsoft Office files 236  
application  
messages  
accessing online services for 153  
adding emoticons to 146  
adding predefined phrases to 146, 155  
adding Web links to 148  
automatically addresssing 77  
automatically downloading 135  
character limits for 142  
checking status of 97, 98, 227  
color-coding 151  
copying to multiple recipients 129  
disappearing 324  
Microsoft Outlook. See Outlook  
Microsoft Windows. See Windows  
mirror 11  
drafting 122, 130  
entering invalid characters in 146  
Mobile Broadband Network 96, 110, 111,  
playing voicemail 63  
removing groups of 134  
resending 130  
selecting formats for 138  
setting alerts for 136  
See also Sprint Power Vision  
Mobile Digital TV 105, 340  
Mobile Email 105, 115  
mobile networks 318  
mobile phones 349  
setting maximum size for 137  
model numbers 359  
sorting 128, 148  
viewing truncated 128  
Messaging application 51, 142, 146, 151  
Messaging button 10  
modems 110111, 339  
monitoring signal strength 96  
Month view 221, 228  
mouthpiece 11  
Messaging icon 142, 149  
messaging preferences 151152  
messaging services 105, 142, 324  
movies 108  
multimedia files 194  
multimedia messages  
microphone 11, 66, 79, 318, 319  
Microphone pick list 186  
microSD cards 12, 269  
See also Picture Mail  
adding attachments to 130132  
addressing 144, 146  
382  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
attaching voice memos to 239  
creating 144145, 146  
sending 142, 145  
naming  
expansion cards 272  
favorite buttons 76  
picture albums 189  
viewing status of 150  
multimedia messaging service 105  
multi-phone accounts 26  
music  
adjusting volume for 206  
answering phone calls and 62  
converting to supported formats 205  
copying 202  
creating playlists for 207  
downloading 202  
listening to 195, 206  
pausing 206  
playing in the background 207  
storing 330  
transferring to device 202, 205  
music applications 202  
music files 161, 195, 202, 205  
Music Manager 195196201  
Mute button 66  
playlists 207  
navigator 10, 42  
navigator buttons 42, 44  
Network Selection pick list 95  
networks 94, 95  
See also Sprint Mobile Broadband network;  
Sprint National Network  
New Bookmark screen 165  
New events use time zones check box 222  
new lines in memos 234  
New message pick list 151  
news information 108  
No Service message 96  
nonwireless features. See organizer features  
Normal mode box 168  
Note button 217  
notes 217, 226, 231  
See also memos  
My Centro icon 249  
notifications. See alerts  
number display formats (calculator) 243  
number formats 280  
N
names  
numbers  
See also device names; user names  
accessing Sprint Power Vision services  
and 106  
searching for 58  
sorting on 148  
See also phone numbers  
entering 48  
storing in calculator 244  
Numbers pick list 280  
numeric pages 64  
Index  
383  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
O
overdue tasks 227, 232  
overwrite options 263  
Office 2007 files 236  
owner information 295  
Owner Preferences screen 295  
offline viewing 165  
On a call check box 290  
On Demand categories 109  
On Demand feature 105107109, 338  
On Demand icon 107  
On Demand menu screen 108  
online photo albums 193  
Online Services icon 153  
opening  
P
page icon 64, 150  
paging 64  
paired devices option 176  
paired relationships. See partnerships  
Palm albums 182, 184  
Palm Desktop icon 263  
Palm Desktop software  
adding events and 220, 222  
creating device passwords and 294  
defined 338  
entering contacts and 216  
sending email and 323  
synchronizing with 28, 33, 36, 311  
transferring to device 29  
uninstalling 313  
Palm Files application 271  
Palm Media application 194  
Palm online support 334  
Palm OS by ACCESS 335, 339  
See also Palm OS devices  
Palm OS devices  
beaming information to 259  
calculating space on 29  
freeing space on 30  
Alert screens 98  
applications 5152, 270, 283  
email attachments 124, 132  
files 237  
Web pages 157, 159  
operating system (device) 339, 362  
Optimized mode 158, 328  
Option button 10  
Option key 47, 48, 338  
Option Lock 48  
optional passwords 26  
options 45  
organizer features 55, 215  
outages 326  
Outbox 122, 130, 143, 150  
Outlook  
accessing corporate groupware and 139  
adding events and 220, 222, 226  
deleting duplicate information in 316  
downloading 36  
entering multiple contacts and 216  
synchronizing with 28, 33, 36, 262, 315  
installing synchronization software for 32  
384  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
synchronizing information on 314  
transferring information from 29  
Palm OS software 29, 249  
See also applications  
sending Picture Mail messages and 144  
Paste command 163  
pasting 57, 163  
patches 253  
Palm Software Installation CD 8, 32  
PalmSoftware.pkg icon 32  
paper clip icon 130, 132  
Pause button 206  
PCs. See computers  
PDF files 132, 236, 237  
pending alerts 147  
pending messages 143  
partnerships  
performance 17, 80  
changing device names and 81  
creating 81, 170, 173, 175  
defined 339  
pass codes 25  
See also passwords  
personal accounts 26, 335, 336  
personal calendar. See calendar  
personal information 26, 258, 292, 295  
software  
passkeys 81, 172, 173  
Password box 292  
personalizing Web page content 107  
phone  
password hints 292  
passwords  
See also phone calls; phone numbers  
accessing directory assistance for 336  
accessing operator services for 336  
adding hands-free devices and 79  
adjusting ringer volume for 88  
answering 61, 62, 69, 84  
connecting to TTY/TDD devices 93  
customizing 8592  
accessing online photo albums and 193  
accessing voicemail and 25  
changing 26  
changing owner information and 295  
creating 26  
entering voicemail 63, 64  
forgetting 294  
making phone calls and 66, 76  
protecting personal information and 292  
recovering 294  
dialing 5759, 76, 90  
enabling as modem 110111  
enabling Flash mode for 73  
getting started with 22, 23  
hanging up 65, 66, 71, 73  
locking 290291  
resetting device and 305  
making emergency calls and 346  
Index  
385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
maximizing battery life and 18, 287  
redialing 60  
receiving 256162, 69  
routing to Bluetooth devices 80, 82, 84  
running applications during 67  
screening 89  
roaming and 9495  
safety guidelines for 346, 347, 348  
selecting alert tones for 87  
selecting ringtones for 86, 89, 239  
setting up call waiting for 69  
setting up conference calls for 7071  
silencing ringer for 62  
text messaging and 146  
troubleshooting problems with 318320  
turning on and off 17, 54, 55  
Phone application  
sending to voicemail 25, 61, 69, 70  
switching to a second 69, 70  
transmitting location during 91  
viewing information about 65  
Phone Display Options command 85  
phone headsets 11, 66, 79, 80, 97  
Phone Info command 24  
Phone Info screen 24, 106  
Phone Lock command 290  
phone numbers  
customizing Main view in 85  
defined 339  
displaying calendar in 221  
displaying current events in 85  
monitoring device status and 96  
opening 51, 56  
adding pauses to 76  
adding speed-dial buttons for 76  
adding to Contacts list 68  
assigning Quick Keys to 75, 77  
copying and pasting 57  
selecting wallpaper for 85, 191  
Phone as Modem feature 339  
phone book 83  
dialing extra digits with 66, 76, 90  
displaying recently dialed 60  
entering 57, 58, 66, 85, 90  
formatting 90  
Phone button 10, 56  
phone calls  
getting device 24  
See also phone; phone numbers  
adding a second 69  
highlighting 59  
saving 68  
adjusting volume for 23  
disabling screen for 290  
forwarding 7172, 91  
holding 66, 69  
making 235760, 70, 74, 319  
selecting 59, 60, 72, 148  
viewing 59, 60  
Phone Off message 55, 96  
phone preferences 72, 90, 91  
Phone Preferences command 91  
386  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Phone Preferences screen 72, 91  
phone-to-computer connections 110  
photo albums. See albums  
Photo Settings screen 186  
photos  
Picture Mail Web site 145, 193  
pictures  
adding caller ID 89, 217  
adding to albums 189  
adding to background 227  
assigning to contacts 191  
backing up 194  
See also pictures  
adding voice captions to 183  
attaching to email 130, 132  
deleting 183  
copying 190  
printing 153  
saving 183, 184  
displaying 187, 193, 194  
downloading 161  
pick lists 43, 45  
removing from albums 189, 192  
rotating 192  
saving as wallpaper 191  
sending 130, 144, 145, 183, 187  
storing 330  
Pics&Videos application  
creating albums and 189  
opening 187  
playing videos and 188  
updating information in 35, 36  
viewing pictures and 187  
viewing slide shows and 188  
Pics&Videos button 187  
picture file types 161  
synchronizing 36  
taking 145182183, 329  
transferring to smart device 31  
uploading 193  
PIM software 339  
picture formats 187, 194  
Picture Mail  
plain text messages 138  
Play icon 162  
accessing online albums for 193  
changing screen fonts for 278  
defined 339  
playback controls 162, 206, 211  
playback, pausing 206, 239  
playing  
making phone calls and 59, 67  
sending messages and 142, 144, 153  
troubleshooting 325  
music 195208  
streamed content 162, 210, 211  
video clips 184, 193  
voice captions 187  
Picture Mail message icon 98, 150  
Picture Mail Online Services 153  
Picture Mail service 182  
voice memos 239  
playlists 207208  
Index  
387  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pocket Tunes 188, 195, 202, 206  
PocketMirror 222  
protecting information 26, 258, 288, 292,  
POP servers 115  
proxy servers 168  
ports 12, 34  
power adapter 17  
PSAPs (public safety answering points) 93  
pTunes icon 202  
power charger 17  
public safety answering points 93  
punctuation 48  
purchasing batteries 14  
Purge command 148, 226, 232  
Purge pick list 148  
purging. See deleting  
push operations 124, 138, 216, 322, 324  
power consumption 17, 18  
Power Preferences screen 287  
power settings 287  
Power Vision. See Sprint Power Vision  
Power/End button 61, 66  
Powering off screen 55  
PowerPoint files 131, 132, 236, 237  
PowerPoint presentations. See PowerPoint files  
preferences. See customizing  
Premium Services 26  
Preparing Vision Services dialog box 104  
preset buttons 75  
preset delays 292  
primary application 51, 283  
printing service 153  
priority settings  
email 122, 130  
tasks 230, 231  
text messages 143  
privacy flag 231  
Privacy Mode check box 151  
privacy settings 288  
private entries 217, 231293294  
processor 362  
programmable buttons 75  
Prompt sound pick list 186  
Q
quarantined files 29, 31, 302  
quick buttons 51, 54, 283  
Quick Keys 75, 77  
Quick Tour 334  
QuickText icon 146  
QuickText phrases 146, 155  
R
radio 362  
radiofrequency (RF) emissions 346354355  
random number generator 243  
range (Bluetooth devices) 80  
recharging the battery 17, 18  
Record Completion Date check box 233  
recording serial numbers 359  
recording time (video clips) 185  
recurring events. See repeating events  
Redial list 60  
redirectors 327  
Reformatting in progress message 305, 306  
388  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
regulatory numbers 359  
Reminder Sound pick list 228  
reminders. See alerts  
Roaming Preferences command 94  
Roaming Preferences screen 94, 95  
roaming warnings 95  
Remove from album command 189  
removing. See deleting  
Rotate command 192  
rotating pictures 192  
Rename Memo command 239  
Repeat Alarm pick list 228  
Repeat pick list 224  
repeating events 224, 228  
repeating tasks 230  
replacing batteries 14, 297307308  
Reply button 129  
resetting smart device 304306  
Resolution pick list 186  
restoring defaults 283  
restoring information 311  
Review photos/videos pick list 186  
ringer 62, 88  
Ringer switch 12, 276  
ringtone file types 161  
Ringtone pick list 89, 217  
ringtone preferences 86  
ringtones  
S
safe resets 304  
safety information 343, 345, 346, 348  
Save As command 237  
Save as Contact command 191  
Save as Wallpaper command 191  
Save Drafts button 122  
Save Page command 165  
saving  
drafts 122, 130  
email attachments 133  
files 237  
images 161  
notes 234  
phone numbers 68  
photos 183, 184  
playlists 207  
videos 184  
voice memos 238  
Web pages 165, 166  
schedules. See calendar  
scheduling mail delivery 135  
screen  
assigning to contacts 89, 217  
attaching to email 132  
downloading 86  
selecting 86, 239  
roaming 9495, 97  
Roaming icon 94, 97  
Roaming message 96  
Roaming pick list 86  
activating items on 43  
dimming 18, 47, 278, 287  
disabling 288, 290  
highlighting items on 43, 45  
Index  
389  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
locking touch-sensitive features on 290  
maximizing battery life and 18  
moving around on 42  
sending  
applications over Bluetooth 256  
email 122, 130, 138  
re-aligning 280, 310  
selecting items on 43  
troubleshooting problems with 310  
turning on and off 54, 287  
waking up 54, 67  
information over Bluetooth 256  
multimedia messages 142, 145  
text messages 142, 143, 144  
Sent folder 128, 143, 150  
serial numbers 359  
screen fonts 278279  
screen protectors 310  
service plans 8  
See also Sprint Power Vision  
screen specifications 363  
screening phone calls 89  
screens, scrolling through 42  
scroll arrows 43  
Set memory limit for storing pages option 168  
Setup Devices screen 81, 172, 175  
Shift/Find key 48  
short code 143  
scroll bars 43  
scrolling 42, 43  
SD cards 269  
Short DTMF Tones check box 91  
Short Messaging Service. See SMS messaging  
services  
searching for contacts 58, 85  
searching for signal 18  
secondary application 51, 283  
Secure Digital cards 269  
secure Web pages 158, 328  
security 258, 288  
Show Address Bar check box 167  
Show Calendar event check box 85, 221  
Show Categories check box 233  
Show Category Column check box 227  
Show Category List check box 227, 228  
Show Completed Tasks check box 233  
Show Dial Pad option 85  
Security icon 292  
Security screen 292  
security settings 293  
security software 288  
Select Media screen 130  
self-portrait mirror 11  
Send button 122, 130, 143, 145  
Send To Handheld droplet 204, 251  
Send with Online Services option 183, 185  
Send with PictureMail option 183, 185  
Show Due Dates check box 233  
Show Due Tasks check box 227  
Show Favorite buttons check box 85  
Show Message Alerts check box 152  
Show Messages check box 227  
Show Priorities check box 233  
Show Records option 294  
Show Time Bars check box 227  
Show timestamps check box 151  
390  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Show Wallpaper option 85  
Showbiz selection 108  
Shutter sound pick list 186  
Side button 10, 283  
signal 18, 55  
not turning on 17  
positioning 319  
purchasing batteries for 14  
recording owner information for 359  
resetting 304306  
Signal faded pick list 87  
signal strength 17, 96, 318  
signal-strength icon 55  
Signature command 138  
signatures 138  
safety guidelines for 343, 345, 346, 348  
setting passwords for 292, 294  
setting up 21, 26, 334  
synchronizing PCs with 35  
temporarily disabling 18  
transferring files to 2931  
troubleshooting 334  
silencing system sounds 276  
silent alarm 276  
SIT files 251  
turning on or off 319  
Size button 29  
unlocking 22, 292  
Skip Pass Code feature 25  
slide show options 188  
slide shows 188  
unpacking 8  
smart device controls 9, 11, 12  
SMS messaging services 325, 339  
SMTP servers 323  
slider 43  
smart device  
Snooze button 99  
activating 22  
soft resets 304  
charging 15, 17  
software  
See also applications  
connecting to computers 34, 110  
connecting to power sources 15  
customizing 275  
downloading 161, 249, 250, 251  
included with device 309, 334, 363  
installing bonus 37, 249, 250  
installing Sprint Connection Manager 110  
installing synchronization 3233  
installing third-party 303, 330  
sending email and 323  
synchronizing information and 28, 36,  
discovering 257  
extending storage capacity of 269  
finding compatible devices for 80, 321  
freeing space on 330  
getting additional information about 335  
getting phone number for 24  
locking 292293  
monitoring status of 9698  
uninstalling 313  
not responding 304  
software conflicts 313  
Index  
391  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Software Installation CD 8, 32  
songs. See music  
Sprint Mobile Broadband Network 96, 110,  
Sort button 128  
Sprint Mobile Email 105, 115  
Sprint Music Manager 195196201  
Sprint National Network 55, 94, 105, 111  
Sprint Operator Services 336  
Sprint PCS Network 95  
Sprint Picture Mail. See Picture Mail  
Sprint Power Vision 94, 104, 326, 339  
Sprint Power Vision data services 157  
Sprint Power Vision home page 104  
Sprint Power Vision services 104, 105, 106  
Sprint Power Vision sessions 305  
device  
Sort by Date command 148  
Sort by Name command 148  
Sort by pick list 233  
sorting messages 128, 148  
sorting tasks 233  
sound clips 144  
sound files 132  
Sound Off icon 276  
Sound On icon 276  
Sound On position 12  
sound preferences 86, 228276277  
Sound Preferences command 86, 87, 228  
sounds 86, 149, 229  
Sprint Premium Services 26  
Sprint status message 96  
speaker 9, 10, 11  
Sprint TV 105210211, 340  
Command service  
Sprint Web site 335  
Start With pick list 167  
speakerphone 11, 17, 65  
special characters 48, 49, 50  
speed-dial icon 59  
Spkr-phone button 65, 67  
sports information 109  
starting Sprint Power Vision sessions 305  
static 319, 321  
spreadsheets 131, 132, 236, 237  
Sprint 411 336  
static electricity 357, 358  
statistical functions 243  
Sprint Connection Manager 110  
Sprint Connection Manager icon 110  
Sprint Customer Service 26, 335  
Sprint Email icon 116, 117, 120  
Sprint Instant Messaging 105154156  
status icons (Inbox) 128  
status icons (phone) 56  
status information 96, 160  
stereo adapters 195  
stereo headphones 195  
stereo headsets. See headsets  
392  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
stock ticker 109  
system sounds 276277  
storage 269  
System Volume pick list 277  
streaming 162, 210, 211, 340  
StuffIt Expander 251  
stylus 12, 42, 43, 297  
sub-account passwords 26  
support (Palm) 334  
support (Sprint) 26, 332  
Swap button 70  
symbols 48, 49, 50, 146  
sync button 34, 37, 283  
sync cable 11, 16, 34, 37  
sync connector 11  
sync operations, troubleshooting 311317,  
synchronization defaults 35, 36  
synchronization settings 262  
synchronization software 32, 33, 36  
synchronizing  
calendar 36, 138, 222, 316, 317  
contacts 36, 138  
email 35, 138  
information 28, 33, 35, 262, 314  
memos 36  
over corporate servers 138  
over infrared connections 266  
tasks 36  
voice memos 238  
system color schemes 280  
system errors 333  
T
Take new picture option 145  
Take new video option 145  
Talk button 10  
Tap and Drag pick list 167  
tapping 12, 42, 310  
Task Details screen 230  
tasks  
adding 230  
checking off 231  
completing 231, 233  
customizing 233  
deleting 232  
displaying 227, 231, 233  
marking as private 231  
prioritizing 230, 231  
setting alerts for 233  
sorting 233  
synchronizing 36  
transferring to smart device 29  
Tasks application  
managing tasks with 230232  
opening 230  
updating information in 35, 36  
Tasks icon 230  
Tasks list 220  
Tasks Preferences screen 233  
TDD devices 93  
technical support 26, 332, 334  
system requirements 28, 363  
system resets 304  
Index  
393  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
telecommunications devices 93  
Telecommunications Relay Service 93  
telephone. See phone  
temperature conversions 243  
text  
copying 163  
deleting 58  
enabling auto-complete for 167  
entering 48, 146, 155  
highlighting 44  
searching 248  
synchronizing with 33, 311  
transferring to device 29, 31  
troubleshooting 331332  
viewing error messages for 333  
third-party phone calls 336  
third-party utilities 29  
three-way calling 7071  
Thumbnail view 187, 189, 192  
time 240, 285  
searching for 164, 248  
viewing against pictures 227  
text fields 43  
See also clock  
time formats 279  
text message icon 98, 150  
text messages  
Time pick list 279  
time slots 224, 227  
addressing 77, 142, 146  
creating 61142143, 146  
deleting 148  
dialing from 59  
displaying 149  
time stamps 151  
Time Zone pick list 222  
time zones 222, 285, 317  
timed events 222, 228  
Timed Events check box 228  
Tips command 334  
receiving 147  
sending 142, 143, 144  
troubleshooting problems with 325  
viewing status of 97, 98, 150  
text messaging 18, 105, 142, 151  
See also text messages  
text messaging service 339  
Text Telephone devices 93  
third-party applications  
getting help with 252  
installing 249, 251, 303, 330  
resetting device and 304, 305  
Tips icon 334  
To Do lists. See tasks  
Touchscreen Preferences screen 280  
touch-sensitive features 290  
touch-tone dialing 91  
transmitting location information 91  
Trash folder 133, 134  
travel adapters 297  
trigonometric functions 243  
troubleshooting 309, 334  
truncated messages 128  
394  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Trusted Device list 171  
Upload to Online Albums option 183, 185,  
uppercase letters 48  
urgent messages 150  
URLs 148, 158, 167  
USB hubs 34  
Trusted Devices button 172, 175  
Trusted Devices screen 329  
trusted devices. See partnerships  
trusted pairs. See partnerships  
TTY/TDD devices 93  
TTY/TDD mode icon 97  
USB port 34  
TTY/TDD pick list 92  
USB sync cable 11, 16, 34, 37  
Use color for pick list 151  
user discussion groups 335  
User folder 340  
user folders 311  
User Guide 334  
TTY/TDD preferences 92  
turning phone on and off 54, 55  
turning screen on and off 54  
TV application 105210211  
TV Guide 109  
user names 106, 127  
U
V
unanswered calls 25  
unauthorized calls 290  
Unfiled category 257, 261  
Unknown Caller pick list 86  
unknown senders 258  
unread messages 98, 137, 150, 227  
Unread messages check box 137  
untimed events 224, 228  
Untimed Events check box 228  
up arrow icon 48  
Update Vision Profile command 333  
updates 335  
updating information 28  
upgrades 2931, 302  
Upload icon 193  
vCal attachments 323  
vCard attachments 323  
vehicle power charger 17  
VersaMail  
accessing corporate information and 138  
creating messages and 129  
customizing 135138  
deleting messages and 133, 134  
downloading attachments and 132  
opening 128  
retrieving messages and 128, 135, 136,  
sending messages and 130, 138  
synchronizing email with 35  
version information 255  
Index  
395  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Vibrate pick list 86, 87  
vibrating alarms 86, 87, 276  
video clips  
favorite buttons 59, 76, 85  
HotSync Log 314  
images 158, 328  
accessing online services for 153  
adding to chat sessions 149  
backing up 194  
instant messages 155  
items in pick lists 45  
menu items 44  
copying 190, 202  
numeric pages 64  
deleting 184  
phone numbers 59, 60  
pictures 187, 193, 194  
private entries 293, 294  
tasks 227, 231, 233  
displaying 184, 188, 193, 194  
recording 145, 184, 186  
removing from albums 189, 192  
sending 130, 144, 145, 185, 187  
storing 184, 189  
streaming 210, 211  
synchronizing 36  
video file types 161  
text messages 149  
unread messages 227  
video clips 184, 188, 193, 194  
Web pages 158, 163, 165  
virtual private networks 296  
Visibility pick list 171, 257  
Vision. See Sprint Power Vision  
Vista computers 335  
voice captions 183, 187, 188  
Voice Command service 74, 94  
Voice Memo application 238239  
Voice Memo icon 239  
Voice Memo list 239  
video formats 194  
video icon 210  
video recording screen 185  
Video Settings screen 186  
View By pick list 282  
viewing  
alerts 979899, 152  
alternate characters 49  
applications 281, 282  
attachments 124, 132  
calendar 220  
connection status 96  
contact information 58, 59, 218  
device names 338  
email messages 128  
error messages 333  
events 85, 98, 228  
voice memos 131, 144238239  
voicemail  
accessing 25, 63, 64  
checking status of 97  
entering passwords for 25, 63, 64  
getting help with 335  
getting number for 63  
listening to 63  
retrieving 64  
396  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
sending calls to 25, 61, 69, 70  
viewing numeric pages for 64  
voicemail accounts 25, 26, 63  
Voicemail Alert pick list 87  
Voicemail favorite button 25, 63, 77  
Voicemail icon 63, 92, 97  
voicemail page icon 150  
Voicemail Pass Code feature 25  
Voicemail Quick Key 75  
Voicemail screen 63  
Web browser  
beaming from 259  
customizing 167168  
enabling offline viewing for 165  
enabling Sprint Power Vision connections  
and 104  
freeing cache for 168, 330  
installing applications from 249, 250  
opening 51  
volume  
alert tones 87  
device ringer 88  
music 206  
phone calls 23  
ringtones 86  
videos 184  
voice memos 239  
Volume button 10, 23  
volume conversions (calculator) 243  
Volume pick list 86, 87  
VPN clients 296  
playing streamed content and 162  
setting default view for 167  
setting home page for 167  
troubleshooting 326328  
viewing Picture Mail and 145  
viewing Web pages with 158160  
Web browser icons 159  
Web browsing 18, 67, 105, 157, 158, 165  
Web forms 159, 167, 328  
Web Link favorite buttons 77  
Web links 148, 159  
Web pages  
accessing 148, 157, 159  
beaming 259  
VPNs (virtual private networks) 296  
bookmarking 163, 165, 166  
caching 168  
copying text in 163  
dialing from 59  
displaying 158, 163  
downloading files from 161  
loading 160, 168  
W
waking up screen 54, 67  
wallpaper 85, 191, 280  
warm resets 304  
warnings 95  
weather information 109  
Web addresses 167  
See also URLs  
locating text in 164  
Index  
397  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
personalizing 107  
saving 165, 166  
transferring music files from 195, 202,  
setting preferences for 167168  
troubleshooting 327, 328  
viewing offline 165  
uninstalling Palm Desktop software  
viewing multimedia files on 194  
Windows operating systems 28, 335  
WinZip 251  
wired headsets 79  
wireless connections 138, 256, 257  
wireless features 18  
Web services 326  
Web sites 157, 327, 328  
Web-based email providers 114, 115  
Week starts pick list 280  
Week view 221  
weights 243  
wireless headsets 79  
Welcome screen 55  
wireless modems 174  
Wide Page mode 328  
Wide Page mode (Web) 158, 159  
Windows computers  
wireless phones 93, 346, 349  
Word files 131, 132, 236, 237  
World Clock 51240241  
World Clock icon 240  
creating device passwords and 294  
installing applications from 251  
installing synchronization software for 32,  
listening to music and 196  
locating user folders on 311  
removing applications from 254  
sending email over 323  
synchronizing over 36, 262, 267, 312,  
Y
Yahoo! email services 115  
Year view 221  
Z
ZIP files 251  
zoom setting 183  
398  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Multiquip Portable Generator DCA125USI User Manual
NetComm Network Router HS1100 User Manual
Nokia Camera Accessories 2118 User Manual
NordicTrack Treadmill NTL190070 User Manual
Omnimount TV Mount 2N1 L
Onkyo Stereo Receiver TX nr838 User Manual
OPTI UPS Power Supply CS500B User Manual
Oregon Scientific Fitness Electronics SE331 User Manual
Ozaki Worldwide Speaker System NB001 User Manual
Panasonic Switch 2SA1806J User Manual